JP2021045210A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably displaying a performance image.SOLUTION: During execution of a variable display or start of the variable display based on a pressing operation on a pressing operation device during a non-game state, a display that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to a special game state, such as a display image including a suggestion performance after ready-to-win or a display image including a reservation display 1622, is displayed in a smaller size than compared with a case where an image constituting the variable display such as the variable display based on a start winning of a special symbol is displayed on the entire display area of a decoration symbol display device 479. As a result, a player can visually recognize efficiently on the basis of the display size that the display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state which is displayed on the basis of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-game state does not have a possibility that causes the special game state after the display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (eg, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-31031

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display unit.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
It is a display selection means for selecting a variation display mode to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. A display selection means for selecting a mode that can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied as a mode of variable display to be displayed on the display unit when the player operates the operation means during a non-gaming state.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means for displaying the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit is provided.
When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display controlling means relates to a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selecting means and the corresponding display. The display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, and at least a part of the corresponding display or at least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that it is displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing (A) is a front view showing a part of the design sheet, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the design sheet in line AA of FIG. 13 (A). (A) to (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device of the second embodiment, and (D) is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet corresponding to each symbol row. Front view of the decorative symbol display device in the modified example of the second embodiment (A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and (B) to (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device of the third embodiment. Front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment (A) is a front view of the light emitting decoration, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the light emitting decoration in line BB of FIG. 18 (A). A screen view showing an example of an effect image displayed by the decorative symbol display device of the fifth embodiment. Schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing operation device included in the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. Schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device according to the operation position The explanatory view which shows the relationship between the operation position of a pressing operation device, and the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device. Front side perspective view of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment Schematic diagram for explaining the pressing operation device included in the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment. (A) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device when a special symbol start winning is generated, and (B) is a screen transition diagram for the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. A screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transitions in a variable display displayed on a decorative symbol display device when a push operation is performed.

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, the structural configuration, the electrical configuration, and various control processes of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shown. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which the top plate portion 111, the bottom plate portion 112, the left side plate portion 113, and the right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). The outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 100, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being in a state of being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 can be rotated is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. To. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided in the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C capable of rotating operations are provided in these three opening / closing restricting units 150A to 150C. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portions arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation, whereby the opening / closing prohibition posture corresponding to the opening / closing prohibition state is changed. And, it is possible to switch between the open / close allowable posture and the open / close allowable posture. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close allowance posture, the open / close prohibition state and the open / close allowance state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by combining movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in a state where the rear block 104 is prohibited from opening and closing, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been raised.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulation mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement regulation mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow control piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be displaced to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is open), the pressure of the flow control piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the slingshot is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided with respect to 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached as. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through the opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. The upper protruding portion 217, the lower protruding portion 218 located on the lower side of the upper protruding portion 217 and projecting forward, and the upper protruding portion 217 and the lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operation device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted to the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game hall. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball pulling mechanism (not shown), and a ball pulling operation member 232 for operating the ball pulling mechanism. The storage section 231 includes an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage section 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage section 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. An outlet (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball pulling mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later flow into the storage unit 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232.

The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. Behind the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operating device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect the contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271-275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271-275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion 211. The left edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and the right edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C are provided as light emitting portions, and the frame emits light corresponding to the respective light emitting portions. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components in an integrated manner. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the remaining amount of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device 291. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the card, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. A predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 accordingly, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are rented out. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the firing operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of operating in the up, down, left, and right directions. These operation devices 261 to 263 are used for an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration can be executed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects involving the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to eject, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are provided in various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271-) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a rebound prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back surface side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is generally divided by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 on the game board 400. It is provided with a guide member 335 that guides the vehicle to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes according to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a halved structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back surface side of the game board 400. Specifically, the attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main control device 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the attachment portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a halved structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates an example of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B) arranged below the central structure 420 and the first special symbol, and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420 and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B and.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle starting winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 that detects the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432, lower grand winning switch 443 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower grand winning device 433, upper grand winning device Top prize switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered 434, the combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, the start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the starting device 436, and below. Non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the grand prize device 433, and a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower prize device 433. The game board 400 is provided with a specific passage switch 448 for detecting the game balls that have entered the game board, general prize switches 449A and 449B for detecting the game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, and the like.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for fraud prevention (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality generated in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, the upper winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. .. Further, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be used as an entrance where the ball is released again into the game area without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B related to the first special symbol does not change the entry probability of the game ball and enters them. The game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not have to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. It may be provided in any one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or is represented by a mechanism that operates by the own weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism.

The right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right-entry regulation mechanism 452 and a right-entry regulation mechanism that change the entry probability of a game ball into the inside by shifting between an entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. The game ball can enter the right-starting winning device 432 by arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is widened. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 enters right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower entry prize device 433 includes a lower entry regulation mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism 453. By shifting between the lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism are provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the lower entry control mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guided posture immersed in the rear. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given an advantageous gaming state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. An upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), but the upper entry control mechanism 454. When is in the admissible posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434.

In addition, as the approach permissible posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning port (or ball entry port) of each device is formed. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. When a lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or a game ball that has entered the right-starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right-starting winning switch 442. When the lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowed posture of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453, and further switches to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 start the operation on the condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of that, it is not necessary. In addition, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 may be configured to start operation after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in a light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing judgment of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing judgment. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of holds depending on the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473 that displays the normal symbol in a variable manner or displays the normal symbol with a stop symbol according to the lottery result in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by a combination of the light emitting states (off, lit, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be fixedly displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided.

The decorative symbol display device 479 includes three symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C arranged in the left-right direction. The symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C are all areas for variable display and definite display of decorative symbols. Of the symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C, the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479A located on the leftmost side constitute the left symbol row, and the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479B located on the rightmost side. Consists of the right symbol column. Further, the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479C located between the symbol display area 479A and the symbol display area 479B form a middle symbol row.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is configured as a reel device including three cylindrical reels (rotating bodies) arranged in the left-right direction. Each reel of the reel device is configured to be independently rotatable by a motor (not shown) controlled by a sub-control board 940.

Each of the cylindrical reels constituting the reel device includes a cylindrical main body (hereinafter, also referred to as a "reel main body") made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, a transparent resin) and an outer peripheral surface of the reel main body. It is provided with a strip-shaped pattern sheet 601 (see FIG. 13) attached along the circumferential direction of the above. The symbol sheet 601 is provided with a plurality of decorative symbols in a predetermined order in a row along the longitudinal direction.

By rotating each reel, the decorative symbol display device 479 moves a plurality of decorative symbols provided on the symbol sheet 601 from top to bottom or vice versa in each symbol display area 479A, 479B, 479C ( Can be scrolled). As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is realized. The decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be composed of a plurality of reels, and may be configured by another device such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an image.

The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 479 are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not always start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Executes various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time reduction state"). Correspond.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the lower prize winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not, the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state (hereinafter, "time reduction state"). (Also referred to as "low probability state"), and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "low probability state"). In the following, it will also be referred to as the "short-time game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is shortened and the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state. It shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability changing gaming state") which is (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but then returns to the normal game state. Further, the probabilistic gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal gaming state.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be configured depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states may be further included, or the gaming states may be shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variable pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various gaming states are generated. When a game ball that has entered any of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the medium start winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol It becomes. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they are started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when the player is not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved or the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. Is started after the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game using random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily executed in the order of the start prize. The unit game superiority control according to the above may be executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative and may be variable at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol and the type of the jackpot correspond to each other, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times that the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture. A plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state such as the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variable pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. The variation patterns of the decorative symbols are roughly classified into the variation patterns in which the reach is displayed before the decorative symbols corresponding to the stop symbols (big hit symbols or lost symbols) related to the first special symbol are confirmed and displayed (hereinafter, "reach"). (Also referred to as "variable pattern"), and a variable pattern in which the reach display is not performed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a lost symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "reach display" means each symbol sequence (for example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), except for one symbol sequence (for example). The decoration of the remaining symbol rows (for example, the middle symbol row) in which the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed in each of the left and right symbol rows) satisfies the condition for becoming a jackpot symbol and the variable display is continued thereafter. It is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit symbol depending on the display result (that is, the stop symbol) when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The reach display includes a normal reach, which is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds), and a reach display with a fluctuation display time longer than the normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). Includes Super Reach. The types of reach display are not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with a variable display time longer than that of super reach.

After the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display time is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol The variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued over the variable display time, and the decorative symbol is varied. The fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern is continued over the display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are in the approach allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the grand prize switch 443, 444 during each approach allowable posture in the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper entry control mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower approach regulation mechanism 453 and the upper approach regulation mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first entry allowed posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after that, a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. In addition, the stop symbol is determined according to the second special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display time is selected, the variation display is executed, and the game state. The transition control and the like of the above are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variation display according to a constant pattern for a predetermined variation display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probability variation gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to enter the permissible posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, the player must first win the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning state. Must. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowed state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since (0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central portion of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball flows down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. The method) and the game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball flows down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the player plays the game by the right-handed game method. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. It also includes a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The substrate 501 is integrally molded with a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and a passage forming member 521 gradually increasing in height as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion having a lower top surface and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height that overlaps vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is continuous downward while being curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball breakage detection unit 539 for detecting ball breakage is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The ball-out detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, so that the game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects a ball out condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game ball stored in the ball passage is discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100. The rear setting switch 905 is set to enable the setting operation for setting the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 100 to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages or 9 stages). It is a pachinko machine.

A predetermined key (not shown) is inserted into the rear setting switch 905 and rotated to a predetermined position (in the present embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial position) to change the ball ejection rate setting. Can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) in a state where the setting change of the ball ejection rate is enabled, the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the ball ejection rate is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. That is, it can be said that changing the setting of the ball ejection rate by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) is performed according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode). (Winning probability) and probability variation continuation rate (in this embodiment, the probability of transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the special gaming state when transitioning to the special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation gaming state) It is possible to select one of nine types of game modes in which the combination with and is different. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball output rate (setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special so that the first hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage are obtained. The ball output rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data according to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type having a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variation continuation rate and the middle type having a medium initial hit probability and a medium probability variation continuation rate. You can select the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly low probability of first hit but a significantly high probability change continuation rate. Further, in each of these types, the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided into three stages of probability states (hereinafter, also referred to as probability setting states) that are smaller than the width of the initial hit probability between each type, that is, The first-stage probability with the lowest first-hit probability among the three stages, the second-stage probability with the second lowest first-hit probability, and the third-stage probability with the highest first-hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the upper and lower middle start winning devices 431A and 431B and the right starting winning device 432 is smaller than that of other types, but the lower grand prize device 433 and the upper grand prize device 434 are won. The number of prize balls associated with this is larger than that of other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 431A, 431B and the right starting winning device 432 is larger than that of other types, but the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are won. The number of prize balls associated with this is less than that of other types.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to judge from the number of prize balls whether the setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and the playability of guessing the setting of which type is made over a long period of time. Can be added.

In addition, the profit margin for the player changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for all types. The profit margins for the players are set to be substantially the same. Therefore, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit per fixed period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall side can be easily predicted, and the game field can be easily managed.

It should be noted that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball ejection rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate as described above, and for example, the first hit probability or the probability variation. It may be any of the inrush rates. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the first hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. The probability that a small hit will be selected, the probability variation inrush rate (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the probability variation game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability variation game state that has shifted after the special game state. May end (for example, the probability that the end of the probabilistic game state is selected in the fall lottery performed each time the variable display of the symbol is executed during the probabilistic game state), and each of these game modes It may be a combination of two or more of.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the ball output rate setting change (game mode setting change) is effectively performed by operating the rear setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. .. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetic character indicating a type and a number indicating a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is represented by the letters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. Further, in each type of probability setting state, the first-stage probability is represented by "1", the second-stage probability is represented by "2", and the third-stage probability is represented by "3".

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the top type first stage probability game mode is "T1", and in the case of the middle type third stage probability game mode. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom type second-stage probability game mode is "B2".

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various electric powers from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine can be turned off by turning off the power switch 909, or by disconnecting and disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are allowed to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is reduced. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal sets the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903. The signal relay unit 903 relays the on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated by approximately 90 ° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows a change in the game mode in response to receiving a setting signal in the ON state from the rear setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900 and the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls a game ball payout operation by the payout device 540 in response to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 in response to an operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted.

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike this, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various production devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , The input operation device 260 is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be capable of information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like so as to be capable of information output communication in only one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a 2 ms (millisecond) cycle) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits interrupts, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like. The variation counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt enable process S1023 for permitting interrupts are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 that sets an initial value in a stack pointer (a part of RAM area) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the determination process S2001 of the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply / firing control board 900 is performed. When it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001: N), the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900. Judgment process S1004, power failure information (a part of the area of the RAM) value determination process S1005, and storage information storage state determination process S1007 are performed, and whether the RAM storage information is erased based on these determination results. Whether or not it is determined. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the saved information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the RAM storage information is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 that initially sets various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the retained information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command are received. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation in the power failure state is executed on the sub-control board 940. To.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is set by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is set. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output process S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

On the other hand, in the determination process S2001, when the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is determined to be in the ON state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), the RAM 922 The RAM clear process S2002 that erases information in substantially the entire area is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear processing S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a predetermined plurality of stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM 922. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear processing S2002 erases information in substantially all areas other than the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, the setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

Next, the setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting change of the game mode is performed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) Is predetermined, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed according to the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, the value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM 922 as the setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is changed, the setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device. Displayed at 906.

Therefore, a setting changer such as a game hall administrator can use the initialization switch 907 until the game mode to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the selection of the game mode can be completed by making the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B win the game ball. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), various information other than the information related to the setting of the game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information) is newly initialized in the RAM 922. The setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, it is confirmed that the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, the set command output process S2006 for outputting the set command indicating the completion of the setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to the normal game processing by receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, and recognizes which game mode the main control board 920 operates in. it can. After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start processing S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power failure, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. To. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also provided except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation display time (variation time), the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first fluctuation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

The winning random number counters, jackpot symbol random number counters, stop pattern selection counters, and variable type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have the above-mentioned configurations, and at least a part of the above counters has other configurations. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as needed. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, the fraud detection information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a lower approach restricting solenoid 463, an upper approach restricting solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are used. The control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower winning winning switch 443, the upper winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right-starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are moved to the forced entry allowable posture, and the game ball is guided to the specific passage of the lower winning device 433 by vibration. , Right-starting winning device 432 by radio waves, Inducing forced malfunction of lower-ranking winning device 433 and upper-ranking winning device 434, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle-starting winning device 431A, There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower grand winning device 433, and the upper grand winning device 434 at an abnormal timing have been performed. Detect the occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the grand prize counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, the intermediate block with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is added by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize balls are continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes a control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the holding control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers. It is selected based on the value and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held.

Further, in the special symbol-related processing S1217, the holding control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers. It is selected based on the value and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for displaying the variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol selected in the special symbol related process S1217 on the decorative symbol display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol-related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub-control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub-control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Design sheet>
Next, the configuration of the symbol sheet 601 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A) is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet 601, and FIG. 13 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the symbol sheet 601 along the line AA of FIG. 13 (A). In FIG. 13B, for reference, the orientation of each surface of the symbol sheet 601 is indicated by an arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (B), the design sheet 601 has a strip-shaped base material 611 having light transmission (transparency) such as transparency and a back surface of the base material 611. The decorative symbol 621 formed on (the surface of the symbol sheet 601 attached to the reel body toward the reel body) and the surface of the base material 611 (the symbol sheet 601 is attached to the reel body). It is provided with a decorative portion 622 formed on a surface that faces outward in the state).

The decorative symbol 621 includes a main symbol 621A that can form a jackpot symbol and a sub symbol 621B that cannot form a jackpot symbol. The decorative symbol 621 is arranged so that the main symbol 621A and the sub symbol 621B alternate along the longitudinal direction of the symbol sheet 601.

The main symbol 621A is configured as a symbol including information that defines individual numerical values (hereinafter, this information is referred to as "numerical information") such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13 (A), the main symbol 621A has a number indicating a numerical value such as "2" or "3" and a character corresponding to each numerical value (for example, a puffer fish corresponding to "2" or "2". It is configured as a symbol that includes both the turtle) corresponding to "3" as numerical information.

In the main symbol 621A, the numerical information may be composed only of numbers indicating numerical values, or may be composed of only characters corresponding to each numerical value (number). In addition, all of the main symbols 621A are symbols that include only numbers indicating numerical values as numerical information, symbols that include only characters corresponding to each numerical value as numerical information, or numerical values indicating numerical values and characters corresponding to each numerical value. The configuration may be unified by any of the symbols including both of the above as numerical information, or the configuration may be a mixture of these symbols.

The main symbol 621A is configured as, for example, a symbol including numerical information corresponding to each numerical value from "1" to "9". The main symbol 621A may be a symbol including numerical information corresponding to each numerical value excluding some numerical values (for example, "4") among the numerical values from "1" to "9".

The jackpot symbol is composed of, for example, a predetermined combination of the main symbols 621A in each symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row, middle symbol row) (for example, a combination of the same main symbol 621A). In the unit game related to the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), if the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery is won, the jackpot symbol stops on the preset effective line. It is confirmed and displayed as a symbol.

The "effective line" is a line in which the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state when the jackpot symbol by the decorative symbol is displayed on the line as a stop symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, five effective lines are set. Specifically, three horizontal effective lines (specifically, the uppermost line, the lowermost line, and the middle line between the upper line and the lower line). Two effective lines in the diagonal direction (specifically, an effective line in the upward-sloping direction and an effective line in the downward-sloping direction) are set.

The number of effective lines to be set does not necessarily have to be 5, and one or a plurality of appropriate numbers may be set. For example, the upper line, the lower line, and the middle line may be set as three effective lines, or one effective line such as the middle line may be set.

The main symbols 621A are arranged on the symbol sheet 601 so that the numerical values of the numerical information are in ascending or descending order from top to bottom when the reel is viewed from the front. For example, in the symbol sheet 601 used for the reel corresponding to the left symbol row in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main symbol 621A corresponds to numerical information when the reel is viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 13 (A). The numbers are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom. On the other hand, in the symbol sheet 601 used for each reel corresponding to the right symbol row and the middle symbol row, the main symbol 621A has the numerical values corresponding to the numerical information in descending order from top to bottom when the reels are viewed from the front. Be arranged.

The sub symbol 621B is configured as a symbol of a predetermined symbol that is smaller than the main symbol 621A and does not include numerical information. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the sub-symbol 621B is configured as a star-shaped symbol. In the symbol sheet 601 the sub symbol 621B is arranged between the two main symbols 621A.

The decorative design 621 (main design 621A, sub design 621B) is formed with a coating film on the back surface side of the base material 611 by printing with an ink having light transmission. Therefore, when a backlight (not shown) provided on the inner peripheral side of the reel body is turned on, the light from the backlight passes through the decorative symbol 621 and the base material 611, and is drawn on the symbol sheet 601. The decorative design 621 can be displayed by light emission.

The decorative portion 622 is provided outside the forming region of the decorative symbol 621 (main symbol 621A, sub symbol 621B) in the symbol sheet 601. The decorative portion 622 is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621. The "at least a part of the color for coloring the decorative symbol 621" is, for example, a main color for coloring each main symbol 621A included in the decorative symbol 621 (for example, a color for coloring the largest area in the main symbol 621A). ) May be the color that most easily reflects light (for example, the color that has the highest brightness), or may be the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color all the decorative symbols 621.

Further, the "color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined by, for example, the presence or absence of brilliance, or may be defined by the brightness of the color. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, the decorative design 621 is colored with an ink that does not contain a bright material, and the decorative portion 622 reflects light as compared with at least a part of the colors that color the decorative design 621. As an easily configured color, it is colored with a brilliant color such as a metallic color (for example, gold or silver) or a pearl-like color (for example, pearl-like white).

Alternatively, as a color configured in which the decorative portion 622 is configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the decorative symbol 621, the color that is most likely to reflect light among the colors that color the decorative symbol 621 is compared. It may be configured to be colored with a high-brightness color (for example, a high-brightness color such as white or pale yellow).

As shown in FIG. 13B, the decorative portion 622 is formed with a coating film on the surface side of the base material 611 by printing using an ink having a color that easily reflects light. As a result, the decorative portion 622 is in a state of protruding forward (front side) from the decorative symbol 621 formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, and the decorative portion 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative symbol 621. it can. The decorative portion 622 may have a smooth surface (a surface facing outward) or an uneven surface thereof, and the surface of the decorative portion 622 may have a smooth portion and an uneven portion. And may be mixed.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a decorative symbol 621 is formed on the back surface side of the sheet-shaped base material 611 having light transmission (transparency), and the decorative design is on the front surface side of the base material 611. A decorative portion 622 is formed on the peripheral side of the 621. As a result, the decorative portion 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative symbol 621, so that the decorative feeling of the decorative symbol 621 by the decorative portion 622 can be improved.

In particular, since the decorative portion 622 is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621, it is possible to add gorgeousness and glitter to the decorative portion 622. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the decorative portion 622 can be more preferably improved.

In this way, by improving the decorative feeling by the decorative portion 622, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the decorative pattern 621 provided on the peripheral side of the decorative portion 622, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine. Can be made to.

Further, the reels of the reel device constituting the decorative symbol display device 479 have a base material 611, a decorative design 621 having a coating film formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, and a coating film formed on the front surface side of the base material 611. Since the symbol sheet 601 provided with the decorative portion 622 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel body, the decorative feeling of the decorative portion 622 is improved, so that the decorative symbol 621 is displayed in a variable manner or stopped (confirmed). The degree of attention to the display) can be suitably improved.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a pattern that can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation is drawn on the symbol sheet 601.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment (hereinafter, the embodiment is also referred to as “first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. To do. Further, the configuration described below as the second embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, or a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above. You may prepare instead of.

14 (A) to 14 (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the second embodiment. FIG. 14D is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row. In FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C), for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is shown by a dashed-dotted line.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, a heater 650 that functions as a heat source is provided on the inner peripheral side of each reel body corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, respectively. , It is provided at a position where it can overlap with the patterns 721A and 721B described later in the front view.

The symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is normally difficult to see or cannot be seen, but when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, the light is retroreflected and visually recognized. The possible patterns 701, 702, and 703 are provided. The symbols 701, 702, and 703 are drawn straddling the symbol sheets 601 corresponding to the respective symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 in the final display, each of the symbols 701, 702, and 703 is drawn. It is constructed so that the pattern is completed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), in each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is confirmed and displayed in a state of being arranged on the middle line L2. In the case of (that is, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol), the symbol 701A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 is displayed. The symbol 701 is completed by the symbol 701B provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the right symbol row Z2 and the symbol 701C provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14C, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2, and in the middle symbol row Z3. When the confirmation display is performed with the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" arranged on the middle line L2, the symbol 702A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. The design 702 is completed by the design 702B provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the right design row Z2 and the design 702C provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the middle design row Z3.

That is, in a configuration in which the stop order of the decorative symbols 621 that are displayed in a variable manner is the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z2, and the middle symbol row Z3, the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 are numbers corresponding to the numerical values "5". After the reach is displayed on the middle line L2 by the main symbol 621A containing the information, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" is stopped in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z3, so that the lost symbol (lost symbol) More specifically, the pattern 702 is completed when it becomes a lost pattern constituting the lost reach).

Further, in the symbol sheet 601 of the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2, and is also arranged. When the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" is arranged on the middle line L2 in the middle symbol row Z3 and the confirmation is displayed, it is provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. The design 703A is completed by the design 703A, the design 703B provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the right design row Z2, and the design 703C provided on the design sheet 601 corresponding to the middle design row Z3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the design sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and the design sheet 601 is similar to the design 701 or the like. When a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, the pattern that can be visually recognized by the retroreflection of the light has retroreflective property on the surface side of the base material 611 and is irradiated with the flash light or the like. It is formed by an ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green).

Therefore, in the final display, when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 and the predetermined symbol (for example, the symbol 701 or the symbol 702) is completed, the flash photography by the camera is performed. , An image showing the predetermined pattern drawn in a predetermined color can be obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is normally difficult to see or invisible, but can be seen when heated or heated. The patterns 721A and 721B are provided.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the symbols 721A and 721B are viewed from the front when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is located on the middle line L2. Is provided at a position overlapping the heater 650. The patterns 721A and 721B are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 with ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or heated.

The heater 650 is displayed when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is arranged on the middle line L2 in each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 (that is, the numerical value "7"). When the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the above is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol), it is configured to be heated or heated by the control by the sub control board 940.

Therefore, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol, the symbols 721A and 721B appear visibly in a predetermined color. When the heating or heating of the heater 650 is started by the confirmation display in the state where the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is arranged on the middle line L2, the sub-control board The 940 ends heating or heating by the heater 650 when the variation display of the special symbol is subsequently started.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the design sheet 601 is normally difficult to see or cannot be seen, but can be seen by retroreflecting the light when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied. 701, 702, and 703, and 721A and 721B, which are normally difficult to see or invisible but can be seen when heated or heated, are provided, so that different patterns are provided in different situations. Can be displayed visually. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine by different patterns that can be visually recognized depending on the situation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is a predetermined lost symbol (for example, the lost symbol shown in FIG. 14C), a specific symbol such as the symbol 702 is flashed. It can be made visible by irradiation with light (for example, flash photography with a camera). When the decorative symbol 621 is confirmed and displayed as a lost symbol, if the number of holdings of the unit game right related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is zero, then the special symbol (first special symbol) is displayed. , The state of the lost symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is maintained for a period of time until the start winning of the second special symbol) occurs. That is, a specific pattern such as the pattern 702 can be maintained in a completed state over the period.

Therefore, when the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held is zero, the number of times of holding the decorative symbol 621 is the period during which the completed specific symbol can be visually recognized as a predetermined lost symbol. It can be a longer period than when is 1 or more. The longer the period during which a specific pattern can be viewed, the more it is possible to prevent the player from missing the specific pattern (for example, the camera is not ready for flash photography and the specific pattern is missed). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a playability that enjoys not increasing the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held.

Further, when the decorative symbol 621 is confirmed and displayed with a predetermined jackpot symbol, a special gaming state occurs thereafter, so that the player causes the grand prize device 433,434 to win a game ball in the special gaming state. Because there is a tendency to give priority to the operation for (for example, the operation for the firing handle 252), the operation for making a specific pattern visible (for example, the operation of the camera for flash shooting) cannot be performed, and the specific pattern cannot be performed. You may miss it. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery is not won, the completed specific symbol (for example, the symbol 702) can be visually recognized by irradiation with flash light. Therefore, even if the special symbol lottery is not won, it is possible to provide a playability that allows the visual recognition of a specific symbol to be visually recognized.

As described in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 can be visually recognized when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, for example, the stage 670 is on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 479. By providing the above, it is possible to improve the playability in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation.

FIG. 15 is a front view of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the modified example of the present embodiment. In FIG. 15, the stage 670 provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479 is simply illustrated by the shape of its rolling surface. Further, in FIG. 15, for reference, the game balls P1 and P2 are shown as an example of the game balls that roll on the stage 670. Further, in FIG. 15, for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is illustrated by a alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the modified example, a stage 670 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 479. The stage 670 has a rolling surface that is substantially W-shaped when viewed from the front. A warp passage (not shown) that can guide a game ball flowing down the left side of the central structure 420 to the stage 670 is provided on the left end side of the stage 670, and the game ball that has entered the warp passage is staged. Guide to the left end side of 670.

The game ball that has entered the left end side of the stage 670 reciprocates in the left-right direction on the stage 670 along the rolling surface of the stage 670. By locating the two recesses in the stage 670 formed in a substantially W shape at the portion corresponding to the eyes in the face-like pattern 702, the game balls passing near the recesses (for example, the game balls P1 and P2). ) Can be seen.

As a result, the time when the symbol 702 can be displayed (that is, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left symbol column Z1 and the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the right symbol column Z2). When the main symbol 621A including the above and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2 and the symbol 702 is completed, the timing of flash photography by the camera is performed. This makes it possible to obtain an interesting image as if eyes were added to the pattern 702.

In addition, the light transmission (transparency) that allows the game ball passing through the passage through the passage through which the game ball discharged (falling) from the two recesses in the stage 670 having a substantially W shape can be visually recognized by the player. By forming it with a resin having (light property), it is possible to make the game ball discharged from the recess look like tears. By forming the passage into a zigzag-shaped passage that goes downward while reciprocating from side to side, it is possible to secure a period during which the player can visually recognize the game ball.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the currently set gaming mode can be suggested by using the configuration in which the pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation is drawn is drawn on the symbol sheet 601. Will be done.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the first or second embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the third embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, or the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be added. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form.

16 (A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and FIGS. 16 (B) to 16 (C) are front views of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the third embodiment. Is. In FIG. 16A, in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings, the reel main body R and the symbol sheet 601 attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel main body R are shown separately. Further, in FIG. 16A, for reference, the direction of light irradiation by the illuminant 690 is illustrated by arrows, and the decorative symbols 621 located in the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line are displayed in the vertical direction. The range is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 16B, 16C, and 16D, the positions of the upper line L3, the middle line L2, and the lower line L1 are shown by alternate long and short dash lines, respectively, for reference. ing. Further, in FIGS. 16 (B), 16 (C), and 16 (D), in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings, the color density in the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C is represented by the hatching density. ing. Specifically, the darker the color, the denser the hatching.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16A, the inner peripheral side of each reel body R corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is used as a heat source like the heater 650. Functional heaters 650A, 650B, 650C are provided. More specifically, the heater 650A is provided at a position where it overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the upper line L3 in front view, and the heater 650B overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the middle line L2 in front view. The heater 650C is provided at a position and is provided at a position where the heater 650C overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the lower line L1 in front view.

The heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C are configured as heaters having different temperatures due to heating (heating), respectively. Specifically, the heater 650A is a heater capable of heating to the highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B and 650C, and the heater 650A can be heated to the second highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B and 650C. It is a heater, and the heater 650C is a heater capable of heating to the lowest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. The heating (heating) by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is normally difficult to see or invisible, but is visible when heated or heated. 741A, 741B, 741C are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16B, the symbol 741A includes the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value “7” among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the pattern 621A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the symbol 741B is the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value “9” among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the right symbol row Z2. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the surroundings. Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the symbol 741C is the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value “8” among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3. It is a ring-shaped pattern that surrounds the surroundings.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the design sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and the designs 741A, 741B, and 741C are , Is formed on the surface side of the base material 611 by an ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or heated. The ink forming the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C is configured to develop a darker color as the heating or heating temperature is higher.

Therefore, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the numerical value in the middle symbol string Z3. When the confirmation display is made with the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to "8" arranged on the upper line L3, and the heating (warming) by the heater 650A is performed, the symbol 741A , 741B, 741C are darker in color than when these main symbols 621A are heated by the heater 650B or the heater 650C in a state where they are arranged on the middle line L2 or the lower line L1, as shown in FIG. 16 (B). Is displayed.

Further, when the confirmation display is made with these main symbols 621A arranged on the middle line L2 and the heater 650B heats (heats) the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C, the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C are shown in FIG. As shown in C), these main symbols 621A are thinner than the case where they are heated by the heater 650A in the state where they are arranged in the upper line L3, and the heaters in the state where these main symbols 621A are arranged in the lower line L1. It is displayed in a darker color than when heated by 650C.

Further, when the confirmation display is performed with these main symbols 621A arranged on the lower line L1 and heating (heating) is performed by the heater 650C, the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C are shown in the drawings. As shown in 16 (D), these main symbols 621A are displayed in a lighter color than when they are heated by the heater 650A or the heater 650B in a state where they are arranged on the upper line L3 or the middle line L2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the ball ejection rate setting can be changed (game mode setting change) by operating the rear setting switch 905 (see FIG. 9) and the initialization switch 907 (see FIG. 9). It is configured to be possible, and the currently set game mode is configured to be suggested by the color intensity of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C.

Specifically, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate that maximizes the profit margin for the player (that is, the top type). , Middle type, and bottom type each type has a first-stage probability game mode), the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C have the darkest color (that is, another game mode is set). It is configured to appear in a darker color than when it is present.

More specifically, when the game mode of the first stage probability in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub-control board 940 is subjected to a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second). In the unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery) is not won, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). , The main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2 and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 are arranged on the upper line L3. And confirm the display, and heat or heat the heater 650A. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C can be made to appear in a darker color than when other game modes are set.

Further, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate that has the lowest profit margin for the player (that is, top type, middle). When the type and the game mode of the third stage probability in each type of the bottom type are set, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are the lightest colors (that is, when another game mode is set). It is configured to appear in a lighter color).

More specifically, when the game mode of the third stage probability in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub-control board 940 is subjected to a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second). In the unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery) is not won, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). , The main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2 and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 are arranged on the lower line L1. And confirm the display, and heat or heat the heater 650C. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C can be made to appear in a lighter color than when other game modes are set.

In addition, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate at which the profit margin for the player is the second highest (that is, the top type). , Middle type, and bottom type, the second-stage probability game mode) is set, and the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are set to the first-stage probability game mode in each type. It is configured to be lighter than the case and appear in a darker color than when the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set.

More specifically, when the game mode of the second stage probability in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub-control board 940 is subjected to a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second). In the unit game related to the special symbol when the special symbol lottery) is not won, the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%). , The main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2 and the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2. And confirm the display, and heat or heat the heater 650B. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are lighter than when the first-stage probability game mode is set for each type, and darker than when the third-stage probability game mode is set for each type. Can be revealed.

The probability of appearance of the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won is a fixed value of 1 (for example, about 10%). It may be a variable value that changes depending on the situation. For example, the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C may change according to the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held. Specifically, for example, the higher the number of times the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is held, the higher the probability of appearance of the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C may be.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may change according to the length of the game time. For example, the longer the game time, the higher the probability of appearance of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may be. The game time is, for example, a so-called "customer waiting effect" (that is, a game state such as a title display or a demo display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. It may be the time measured from the timing when the effect display irrelevant to the above is finished, or it may be the time when the firing handle 252 is continuously operated.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may change depending on the game mode. For example, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C may be higher than in the case of the normal gaming state.

It should be noted that the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the numerical value in the middle symbol string Z3. Heating or heating of the heaters 650A, 650B, 650C is started by the confirmation display in the state where the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to "8" is arranged on the lines L1, L2, L3 of each stage. If so, the sub-control board 940 then ends heating or heating by the heaters 650A, 650B, 650C when the variation display of the special symbol is started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the symbols 701, 702, 703 (see FIG. 14) provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are usually difficult to see or cannot be seen. However, it is configured as a pattern that becomes visible when irradiated with black light. That is, the patterns 701, 702, and 703 in the present embodiment are formed by ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green) when the surface side of the base material 611 is irradiated with black light.

On the front side of each reel (reel body R and symbol sheet 601) corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, a light emitting body as a light emitting means capable of irradiating a black light in a range to be a display area of a decorative symbol. A 690 (eg, black light LED) is provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a black light LED as a light emitting body 690 directed to a display area of a decorative symbol on each reel is provided on the front upper side and the front lower side of each reel in the width direction of each reel. They are arranged side by side in a row (in the left-right direction).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is located on the middle line L2, the symbols 701, 702, 703, etc. In the situation where the pattern is completed, the sub-control board 940 is configured to emit light of the light emitter 690 (that is, to irradiate black light). As a result, when the predetermined main symbol 621A is arranged on the middle line L2 in the final display, the player can visually recognize each symbol such as the symbols 701, 702, and 703.

In addition, in a configuration in which a pattern such as a pattern 701, 702, 703 is formed on the pattern sheet 601 with ink that emits light in a predetermined color when irradiated with black light, it is not always necessary to provide a light emitting body 690 capable of irradiating black light. Instead, the player may display a pattern such as a pattern 701, 702, 703 by using a light emitting means that can irradiate a black light, which is owned or lent by the player.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) has not been won, there is a predetermined probability that the pattern becomes visible by heating or heating. The 741A, 741B, and 741C are heated or heated at a temperature according to the currently set gaming mode. Since the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are configured to develop a darker color as the heating or heating temperature is higher, the player can determine the current color of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C in the pachinko machine 100. The type of game mode, that is, the ball ejection rate (machine discount, payout rate) of the game ball can be determined.

Therefore, it is possible for the player to add a game property in which the probability information about the game machine being played is estimated based on the difference in the color development intensity of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C. For example, considering whether the pachinko machine 100 is a game machine suitable for one's own taste or a different game machine, as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine. Since the estimated probability information can be used, it is possible to improve the playability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, the attention of the player is improved by providing the light emitting decorative body 780 with improved decorativeness on the peripheral side (edge side).

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to third embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fourth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to third embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the third embodiments.

FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 400 of the fourth embodiment. 18 (A) is a front view of the light emitting decoration body 780, and FIG. 18 (B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the light emitting decoration body 780 in line BB of FIG. 18 (A).

In FIG. 18A, for reference, a schematic boundary line G between the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 in the peripheral decorative portion 788 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. There is. Further, in FIG. 18B, for reference, examples of the path through which the light output from the light emitting body 782 as the light emitting means travels are shown by arrows J1 and J2.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a light emitting decorative body 780 formed in a star shape in a front view is provided at substantially the center of the upper portion of the central structure 420.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the light emitting decorative body 780 includes a light emitting body 781, 782, a substrate 783, an inner lens 784, a reflector 785, a decorative lens portion 786, and a protruding portion. It includes a 787, a peripheral side decorative portion 788, a decorative sheet 789, and a reflective component 790.

The light emitters 781 and 782 are configured to include a light source capable of expressing full color (for example, a full color LED). The light emitters 781 and 782 emit light in a predetermined color by the light emission control by the sub-control board 940. The light source constituting the light emitters 781 and 782 does not necessarily have to be a light source capable of displaying full color, and may be a light source that emits light in a single color (for example, a white LED).

The light emitting body 781 is a light emitting means arranged inside the inner lens 784. The light emitting body 782 is a light emitting means which is outside the inner lens 784 and is arranged on the rear side (lower side in FIG. 18B) with respect to the peripheral side decorative portion 788 so as to overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view. Is. The light emitters 781 and 782 are arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 18B) of the substrate 783. The substrate 783 is a circuit board such as a printed circuit board provided with illuminants 781 and 782 and electronic components such as resistors for operating the illuminants 781 and 782.

The inner lens 784 is made of a light-transmitting (translucent) resin (for example, acrylic resin) such as a transparent resin, and transmits (light-guides) the light output (light-emitting) from the light-emitting body 781. The inner lens 784 includes a top surface portion 784A that overlaps the front side of the light emitting body 781 in front view and a side surface portion 784B that is continuously provided on the peripheral side of the top surface portion 784A, and is provided so as to surround the front side of the light emitting body 781. Be done.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the inner lens 784 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional shape. More specifically, the top surface portion 784A is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 784B is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The outer shape of the inner lens 784 on the top surface portion 784A side (the outer shape on the front side of the inner lens 784) faces the inner surface of the decorative lens portion 786 described later (more specifically, the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the inner surface of the side surface portion 786B). It is configured so that it can be fitted to a surface (a surface composed of a surface).

The reflector 785 is a light-impermeable component having a color that can reflect light (for example, white), and is adjacent to the outside of the rear side (more specifically, the rear side of the side surface portion 784B) of the inner lens 784. Is provided. The reflector 785 reflects the light emitted outward from the rear side (the side close to the light emitting body 781) of the side surface portion 784B of the inner lens 784 toward the inner lens 784. As a result, the light output from the light emitting body 781 can be suitably guided to the front side (that is, the side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784).

Further, the reflector 785 is located between the light emitting body 782 and the side surface portion 784B of the inner lens 784, and the light output from the light emitting body 782 is preferably forward side (that is, the side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788). Can be guided to.

Therefore, by disposing the reflector 785 between the light emitting body 781 and the light emitting body 782, the light output from the light emitting body 781 can be incident on the decorative lens portion 786 via the inner lens 784. The light output from the light emitting body 782 can be incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. A reflector similar to the reflector 785 may be provided on the side of the reflecting component 790 with respect to the light emitting body 782 (the side opposite to the reflector 785).

The reflector 785 does not necessarily have to be a light-impermeable component having a color capable of reflecting light, and mirror-finished (for example, chrome plating) is applied to each surface of the inner lens 784 side and the light emitting body 782 side. Therefore, it may be configured to have a light-impermeable surface.

The decorative lens portion 786 is made of a resin having light transmission (translucency) such as a transparent resin (for example, acrylic resin), and when the light emitting body 781 is lit (when light is output from the light emitting body 781). In addition, the light transmitted through the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 is transmitted (guided).

The decorative lens portion 786 includes a top surface portion 786A that overlaps the front side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 in front view, and a side surface portion 786B that is continuously provided on the peripheral side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional shape as shown in FIG. 18 (B). More specifically, the top surface portion 786A is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 786B is formed in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A is directly and visibly exposed to the player in a region where the protrusion 787, which will be described later, is not provided. Therefore, when the light emitting body 781 is turned on, the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 through the top surface portion 786A can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the decorative lens portion 786, the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A is formed in a star shape in front view as shown in FIG. 18A. Therefore, in this configuration, by lighting the light emitting body 781, the player can visually recognize the light emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape by the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. The decorative lens portion 786 functions as a first decorative portion constituting the main body portion of the decoration in the light emitting decorative body 780.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is formed in a plate shape in which the front surface 786A1 is a substantially flat surface, the light emitting decorative body 780 is based on the decorative lens portion 786 which is the first decorative portion. The decorative shape (in the present embodiment, the star shape) can be illuminated in a planar shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 has a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, but is inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, downward in front view). It may be in the shape of a plate (which inclines backward as it increases). Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 has a flat plate shape, that is, the front surface 786A1 (front surface visible to the player) and the rear surface (inner lens 784 side). The surfaces) are all substantially flat, but either the front surface 786A1 or the rear surface, or each of these surfaces may be a curved surface, and is a flat surface or a curved surface including fine irregularities. You may.

The protruding portion 787 is made of a resin having the same light transmittance as the decorative lens portion 786, and projects forward from the front surface 786A1 on the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the protruding portion 787 is integrally molded together with the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 described later, so that the protruding portion 787 is connected to the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. The protruding portion 787 may be a component independent of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

The protruding portion 787 is provided along the peripheral edge at least on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the protruding portion 787 is provided on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A formed in a star shape along the peripheral edge, and is in the star shape. It is provided in a substantially straight line connecting adjacent recesses.

The front end surface 787A of the protrusion 787 is subjected to a light diffusion treatment such as sparse surface processing (for example, grain processing). As a result, natural light is diffused on the end face 787A, and the end face 787A can be made to appear whitish. Instead of the sparse surface treatment on the end face 787A, a color that easily reflects light such as white or metallic color (for example, silver or gold) may be printed on the end face 787A.

The peripheral side decorative portion 788 is made of a resin having the same light transmittance as the decorative lens portion 786, and is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786. More specifically, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 projects outward from the side surface portion 786B over the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is connected to the side surface portion 786B by being integrally molded together with the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787. The peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be a component independent of the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787.

The front surface 788A (front surface visible to the player) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured to be a substantially horizontal substantially flat surface. The front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be a substantially horizontal substantially flat surface, and is a plane inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, a plane inclined backward as it goes outward in front view) or a substantially flat surface. May be good. Further, the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be a curved surface, or may be a flat surface or a curved surface including fine irregularities.

In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured to be located behind the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. The front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be on the rear side of the front surface 786A1, and may be located on the front surface side of the front surface 786A1 or may have a configuration in which the position in the front-rear direction substantially coincides with the front surface 786A1. ..

On the other hand, the rear surface 788B (the surface facing the light emitting body 782 side) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined so as to be separated from the substrate 783 toward the outside. As a result, a part of the light output (light emitted) from the light emitting body 782 toward the front is incident from the rear surface 788B and transmitted to the front side (the side of the front surface 788A), and a part is reflected on the rear surface 788B. Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), it proceeds backward and outward.

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is reflected by the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting body 782 (the directly incident light or the light reflected on the rear surface 788B and then reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790. It shines by the light). Therefore, in the light emitting decorative body 780, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is an edge portion as the second decorative portion with respect to the shape (star shape in the present embodiment) of the decorative lens portion 786 as the first decorative portion in the front view. Functions as.

The decorative sheet 789 is composed of a resin sheet having a light transmittance (translucency) of 1 configured on the outer shape (star shape in the present embodiment) of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, and is decorated. It is arranged between the top surface portion 786A of the lens portion 786 and the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784. The decorative sheet 789 may be attached to the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A (the surface facing the inner lens 784 side) or the front surface of the top surface portion 784A (the surface facing the decorative lens portion 786 side). However, the configuration may be such that it is sandwiched between the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the front surface of the top surface portion 784A.

The decorative sheet 789 does not necessarily have to be the resin sheet 1 formed on the outer shape of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, and is divided into a plurality of top surface portions 786A surrounded by the protruding portions 787. It may be a resin sheet of. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 18A, the decorative sheet 789 is a resin sheet corresponding to each of the five substantially triangles formed on the convex side on the star side, and one substantially pentagon formed on the center side. It may be divided into a resin sheet corresponding to the above.

The decorative sheet 789 is configured as a light-transmitting sheet that is entirely colored in a single color (for example, each single color such as yellow or blue) or a plurality of colors. As a result, when the light emitting body 781 is turned on, the light emitted from the front surface 784A1 of the decorative lens portion 786 can be set to a color corresponding to the color of the decorative sheet 789. Thereby, for example, in the configuration in which the inner lens 784 and the decorative lens portion 786 are both made of transparent resin, the player can visually recognize the color of the light emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape with the color of the decorative sheet 789.

When the decorative sheet 789 is colored with a plurality of colors, the decorative sheet 789 may be colored as an independent region, or the plurality of colors may be colored with a gradation. Further, the decorative sheet 789 may have a configuration in which a predetermined pattern (design, pattern, characters, etc.) is drawn.

The reflective component 790 is a resin component provided on the outer side of the light emitting body 782 and having a function of reflecting the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 so as to travel forward and outward. is there.

The reflective component 790 has a front surface 790A which is an inclined surface which is separated downward from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and is inclined so as to be separated from the substrate 783 toward the outside like the rear surface 788B.

In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is configured as an inclined surface substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788. The front surface 790A does not necessarily have to be substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B, and the front surface 790A and the rear surface 788B are not parallel to each other (that is, the inclination angle of the front surface 790A is different from the inclination angle of the rear surface 788B). ) May be.

In the reflective component 790, a part of the front surface 790A overlaps the peripheral decoration portion 788 in the front view, and the rest of the front surface 790A does not overlap the peripheral side decoration portion 788 in the front view (that is, it can be directly seen in the front view). Arranged as. The width of the region (non-overlapping region X3) that does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in the front view of the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is often, for example, about 3 mm or more, and is about 5 mm or more. Is preferable.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light output from the light emitting body 782 toward the front is reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, the reflection described later). It is possible to travel outward while reflecting between the film portion 790B), and a part of the light reflected at the front surface 790A is incident from the rear surface 788B (for example, arrow J1), and a part is a peripheral side decorative portion. The inclination angles of the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 so that the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can travel outward (for example, arrow J2) without incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. The amount of overlap (overlap width) between the rear surface 788B and the front surface 790A in the front view is set.

A reflective film portion 790B that is light-impermeable and capable of reflecting light is formed on the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790. The reflective film portion 790B is a coating film having a substantially uniform thickness formed by, for example, vapor deposition, coating, or printing of a bright pigment such as a metallic pigment.

The reflective film portion 790B may be composed of a single color or may be composed of a plurality of colors. The color of the reflective film portion 790B may be the same as or similar to the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789, and by configuring in this way, a sense of unity is given to the color of the light emitting decorative body 780. It is possible to suppress the unnaturalness of the color scheme and the excessive gorgeousness.

As described above, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is an inclined surface that inclines so as to move away from the substrate 783 toward the outside. Therefore, the reflective component 790 provided with the reflective film portion 790B on the front surface 790A is on the peripheral side. The light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the decorative portion 788 can be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B so as to travel forward and outward.

In the following, the light reflected by the reflecting film portion 790B based on the light from the light emitting body 782 (that is, the reflected light by the reflecting film portion 790B of the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788) is referred to as ". Also called "specific reflected light".

According to the light emitting decorative body 780 configured as described above, the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the region overlapping the rear side (the side of the substrate 783) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view. Since the light emitting body 782 is provided in the light emitting body 782, the light output from the light emitting body 782 is directly incident on the inner side (the side close to the decorative lens portion 786) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

On the other hand, in the region overlapping the rear side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view, the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, the reflective film portion 790B) is located at a position on the outer side of the light emitting body 782. A part of the inner side of) is arranged. As described above, a part of the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B (specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B) is incident on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 from the rear surface 788B. Since it is set to obtain, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be incident on the outer side of the region where the light output from the light emitting body 782 is directly incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. it can.

Therefore, of the light incident from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, the direct light from the light emitting body 782 passes through the direct light transmitting region X1 on the inner side, and the specific reflected light by the reflecting film portion 790B is It transmits the reflected light transmission region X2 on the outer side of the direct light transmission region X1.

In FIG. 18A, a linear boundary line G is shown as a boundary between the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2, but the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X1 are shown. It is not necessary to clearly distinguish X2 from the boundary line G, and there is a region in the vicinity of the boundary line G through which both the direct light from the illuminant 782 and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B are transmitted. There may be.

Further, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 are outside the peripheral side decorative portion 788 without a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B incident on the peripheral side decorative portion 788. Since it is set so that it can travel on the side (that is, the outer side from the reflected light transmitting region X2), a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B is played on the outer side from the peripheral side decorative portion 788. It can travel in the air as light that is directly visible to the person.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the reflector 785 is provided between the light emitting body 781 and the light emitting body 782, the decorative lens portion 786 and the decorative lens portion 786 are generated by the light output from the light emitting body 781 and the light emitting body 782, respectively. The peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be illuminated independently. Therefore, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be independently illuminated as an edge portion with respect to the front view shape (star shape in the present embodiment) of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 capable of transmitting the light output from the light emitting body 782 is provided on the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786. In the peripheral side decorative portion 788, on the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786), the direct light from the light emitting body 782 directly passes through the light transmitting region X1, and on the outer side, the reflective film portion of the reflective component 790. The light reflected in the 790B (specific reflected light) is configured to pass through the reflected light transmission region X2.

As a result, the player determines that the direct light transmitting region X1 in which the light based on the direct light from the light emitting body 782 is emitted and the reflected light transmitting region X2 in which the light based on the specific reflected light by the reflecting film portion 790B is emitted. The appearance of light (for example, brightness and color) can be changed. Therefore, in the peripheral side decorative portion 788 that appears to shine based on the light output from the light emitting body 782 (direct light and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B), the way of shining differs between the inner side and the outer side. Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness by the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 (the decorativeness by the light transmitted through the peripheral decorative portion 788).

Further, in general, since the intensity of the reflected light is smaller than the intensity of the incident light, the direct light from the light emitting body 782 directly passes through the light transmitting region X1 on the inner side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and is outward. On the side, in the configuration in which the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 is transmitted through the reflected light transmitting region X2, the intensity of the light transmitted through the reflected light transmitting region X2 is the light transmitted directly through the light transmitting region X1. Can be weaker than the strength of. As a result, the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be made to appear to shine weaker than the inner side. Therefore, since it is possible to change the way the peripheral side decorative portion 788 shines, it is possible to improve the decorativeness by the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

Since the decorativeness by the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is improved as described above, the light separation from the decorative lens portion 786 that shines in a plane shape by the light from the light emitting body 781 becomes clear. Therefore, the degree of attention to the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be improved. As a result, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 is the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782 (direct light or specific reflected light). Therefore, it is not necessary to separate the light source that is the source of light for passing directly through the light transmitting region X1 and the light source that is the source of light for passing through the reflected light transmitting region X2 (that is,). In that respect, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed and the arrangement of the light sources can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 is incident (entered) on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and a part is on the peripheral side. The light is configured to travel as light directly visible to the player on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (that is, on the outer side of the reflected light transmitting region X2) without incident on the decorative portion 788. Depending on whether the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B passes through the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (more specifically, the reflected light transmitting region X2) or travels on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, the game Since the appearance of light by a person (for example, brightness, brilliance, etc.) can be changed, the decorativeness of the light emitting decorative body 780 made by the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view (that is, the front surface). Since the configuration is such that the player is directly and visually exposed to the visible light, the player can see the reflected light of natural light by the reflective film portion 790B on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (hereinafter, the reflected light is referred to as “the reflected light”. Light that is a mixture of "naturally reflected light") and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to give an impression different from the case where the light that can be visually recognized on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 by the player is only the naturally reflected light, for example, an impressive brilliant feeling (metallic feeling). Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the decorative sheet 789 is arranged on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and the protruding portion Even if the 787 is integrally molded using a transparent resin, it is possible to illuminate only the decorative lens portion 786 (top surface portion 786A) with the color of the decorative sheet 789. Therefore, it is not necessary to manufacture the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 separately, and in that respect, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to directly print a predetermined color, a predetermined pattern, or the like on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A.

When the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 having light transmission is a relatively dark color such as blue, the illuminant 781 is the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789. It is preferable to emit light in the same color as or in a similar color (for example, a bluish color such as light blue when the decorative sheet 789 is blue). As a result, it is possible to prevent the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 from appearing lighter than the original color, as compared with the case where the illuminant 781 is made to emit light in a single white color.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the protruding portion 787 is located on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 along the peripheral edge. It is provided. Since the decorative sheet 789 is provided on the back surface side of the decorative lens portion 786, the protruding portion 787 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative sheet 789. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the protruding portion 787 can be improved.

In particular, since the front end face 787A is light-diffused, it looks whitish due to the diffusion of natural light. As a result, the main color of the decorative sheet 789 (for example, the color that colors the largest area of the decorative sheet 789) is configured to be a color that is less likely to reflect light than white, so that the end face 787A looks whitish. The feeling can be suitably improved.

Further, since the protruding portion 787 protruding forward with respect to the decorative lens portion 786 is provided on the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 along the peripheral edge, in the front view of the decorative lens portion 786. The shape (in the present embodiment, a star shape) can be three-dimensionally decorated by the protrusion 787. Thereby, the decorativeness of the decoration of the light emitting decorative body 780 can be improved.

Further, the protruding portion 787 provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is located between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788. Therefore, the protruding portion 787 has a shape in front view of the decorative lens portion 786 which is the first decorative portion in the decoration of the light emitting decorative body 780, and the peripheral side which is an edge portion as the second decorative portion with respect to the first decorative portion. It is a clear boundary with the decorative part 788. As a result, when the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion (edge portion) in the decoration of the light emitting decorative body 780 are illuminated independently, each portion can be clearly illuminated.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, an image corresponding to (corresponding to) an image including a part of a character appearing in the suggestion effect displayed after the predetermined reach display is displayed is displayed in the reach display. By displaying in the suggestion effect displayed after the reach display different from is displayed, the attention of the player is improved.

The "suggestion effect" is the degree of possibility of transition to the special gaming state after the end of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (hereinafter, "expectation for transition to the special gaming state"). (Also referred to as "degree"), that is, it is an effect that suggests the degree of possibility that the decorative symbol 1621 that is variablely displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 stops at the stop symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fourth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the fourth embodiments.

19 (A) to 19 (D) are screen views showing an example of an effect image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 479 of the fifth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is configured as an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying an image. In FIG. 19B, for reference, the moving direction of the image 822 is illustrated by an arrow.

In the decorative symbol display device 479 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (FIGS. 19A to 19D), the decorative symbol 1621 is displayed as an image. Similar to the decorative symbol 621 (see FIG. 13), the decorative symbol 1621 has a stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery). It is a decorative pattern for displaying on a display device 479.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 1621 is composed of a main symbol capable of forming a jackpot symbol similar to the main symbol 621A (see FIG. 13). The decorative symbol 1621 may include a main symbol and a sub symbol similar to the sub symbol 621B, which cannot form a jackpot symbol.

The main symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1621 is configured as, for example, a symbol including numerical information indicating a plurality of types of numerical values (for example, each numerical value from "1" to "9"). The main symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1621 may be configured as a symbol that includes not only the numbers indicating the numbers but also both the numbers and the characters corresponding to the numbers as numerical information.

The decorative symbol 1621 is variablely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and then confirmed and displayed by the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. (Stop display) is displayed. The display position of the decorative symbol 1621 does not necessarily have to be substantially in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479, and the decorative symbol 1621 may be displayed at various positions within the display area. For example, as shown in FIG. 19, the decorative symbol 1621 may be displayed on the corner side (for example, the upper right corner side) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the decorative symbol display device 479 of the present embodiment, when a reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined suggestion effect by a moving image or an image can be displayed after the variable display is completed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an odd number (for example, a reach display consisting of "7") is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined probability is obtained after the display of the reach display. Then, a suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears (hereinafter, the suggestion effect is also referred to as a "first suggestion effect") is executed. The first suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific reach display such as a so-called super reach.

As the probability of executing the first suggestion effect (that is, the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") when the reach display consisting of odd numbers is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, an appropriate value larger than 0% may be adopted. For example, the probability may be less than 100% (for example, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the first suggestion effect is always displayed (that is, 100%) may be used. The selection of whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect is executed by the control of the sub-control board 940.

Whether the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621 is composed of odd numbers or even numbers is determined by, for example, the main control board 920 when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are started and won. Depends on the jackpot symbol random number obtained by. More specifically, when the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is the jackpot symbol, the sub-control board 940 starts from an odd number or an even number depending on the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot symbol. Determine the reach display to be configured. On the other hand, when the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is a lost symbol constituting the loss reach, the sub control board 940 starts from a predetermined numerical value regardless of whether it is an odd number or an even number. Determine the reach display to be configured.

For the first suggestion effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared according to the degree of expectation (or reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state. For the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each effect pattern, refer to the winning probability in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) and the winning probability in the special symbol lottery. Selection probability in the selection table to be selected (hereinafter, also referred to as "winning selection table") and selection in the selection table (hereinafter, also referred to as "missing selection table") referred to when the player does not win in the special symbol lottery. Determined by probability.

Each moving image data (image data) corresponding to each effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each effect pattern. The sub-control board 940 selects an effect pattern of the first suggestion effect, and displays (executes) the first suggestion effect of the selected effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 479.

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect corresponds to the unit game (that is, the variation display of the special symbol) related to the target special symbol from the main control board 920 by the sub-control board 940. The variation pattern command may be received from the main control board 920, or may be a predetermined timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621. .. Further, in a configuration in which a period during which the operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated is provided for the display of the first suggestion effect, the sub-control board 940 performs the first suggestion effect at the timing when the period ends. It may be configured to select the production pattern.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each effect pattern in the first suggestion effect appears according to the degree of expectation (or reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state set for the effect pattern. Are configured to be of different types. The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the type of the character that appears in the first suggestion effect.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the characters that can appear in the first suggestion effect, for example, short hair holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19C. Characters CA1 and CA2, and ponytail characters CA3 having flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in FIG. 19 (D) are prepared. The difference between the characters CA1 and CA2 is the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B. That is, the characters CA1 and CA2 differ depending on whether the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B is a cat or a star.

For the first suggestion effect in which the character CA1 appears, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is set to, for example, 50%, and for the first suggestion effect in which the character CA2 appears, the special game The degree of expectation for the transition to the state is set to, for example, 10%. Further, for the first suggestion effect in which the character CA3 appears, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is set to, for example, 30%.

The player recognizes the expectation set for each character by the instruction manual distributed to the pachinko machine 100, or determines the relative magnitude of the expectation set for each character. Can be recognized empirically. As a result, the player can most expect the transition to the special gaming state when the character CA1 appears in the first suggestion effect among the characters CA1, CA2, and CA3, and the character CA3 can expect the transition to the special gaming state. When it appears, it cannot be expected as much as the character CA1, but it can be expected more than the character CA2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an even number (for example, a reach display consisting of "6") is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined probability is obtained after the display of the reach display. Then, in the first suggestion effect, an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state appears (hereinafter, the suggestion effect is also referred to as "second suggestion effect". Is configured to be executed.

As the probability of executing the second suggestion effect (that is, the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") when the reach display consisting of even numbers is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, an appropriate value larger than 0% may be adopted. For example, the probability may be less than 100% (for example, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the second suggestion effect is always displayed (that is, 100%) may be used. The selection of whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect is executed by the control of the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 19B, after the reach display consisting of “6” is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621, the images 821, 822, 823 including a part of the character CA1 appear (display) at the same time. ) The second suggestion effect is executed. More specifically, image 821 is an image including the left eye portion of the character CA1 of FIG. 19 (A), and image 822 is an image including the left hand of the character CA1 and a part of the flag 801A held in the left hand. Yes, image 523 is an image including the button portion of the jacket in the character CA1.

In the second suggestion effect in which an image including a part of the character (for example, image 821) appears, the magnitude of the degree of expectation (high degree of expectation) for the transition to the special gaming state is expressed. It is possible to make the player relatively recognize the character according to the type of the character corresponding to.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state for the character corresponding to the image appearing in the second suggestion effect is the degree of expectation when the character appears in the first suggestion effect. It is made the same. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the player who visually recognizes the images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestion effect corresponds to these images 821, 822, 823 in the first suggestion effect. It is possible to recognize the same degree of expectation as when the character CA1 appears.

Images such as images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestion effect, that is, images including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the first suggestion effect are sub-control board 940. It is generated based on the image cut out from the moving image data (image data) corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect stored in the ROM of. Here, the image cut out from the moving image data (image data) is a part of the moving image or the image selected in advance from the moving image or the image composed of the moving image data or the image data, and the expression to be cut out is selected in advance. Or, other expressions such as extraction may be used, and the same shall apply hereinafter.

More specifically, the image appearing in the second suggestion effect is a frame constituting the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state appears in the first suggestion effect. Among them, a corresponding area is cut out from an image of a predetermined frame including the character, and the cut-out image is generated based on the cut-out image (for example, by performing processing such as deformation or enlargement / reduction on the cut-out image).

For example, the image 821 is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out a portion of the region AR1 from an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (A) in the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern appearing by the character CA1. To. Similarly, the images 822 and 823 are generated based on the images obtained by cutting out the portions of the regions AR2 and AR3 from the image of the frame, respectively. Although details will be described later, the images 821, 822 and 823 are generated by subjecting the image obtained by cutting out the portions of the regions AR1, AR2 and AR3 to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect pattern in which the character CA2 appears is also an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (C) in the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character CA2 appears. Therefore, an image to appear in the second suggestion effect is generated based on the image obtained by cutting out each part of the regions AR1, AR2, and AR3. Similarly, with respect to the effect pattern in which the character CA3 appears, from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (D) in the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character CA3 appears, the areas AR1, AR2, Based on the image obtained by cutting out each part of AR3, an image to appear in the second suggestion effect is generated.

In addition, as a region to be cut out of an image in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, it is preferable that the image cut out from the portion of the region can suggest the type of the character. For example, it is preferable that the area includes the eyes of the character, the pattern of the flag 801A held by the character in the left hand, the jacket worn by the character, the buttons of the jacket, and the like, such as the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3.

In the following, an image including a part of a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (for example, an image obtained by cutting out a part of the area AR1) cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect. ) Is also referred to as a "cutout image" or the like.

The cropped image is generated under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 selects one effect pattern from the effect patterns prepared for the first suggestion effect, and in the moving image data stored in the ROM corresponding to the selected effect pattern. A cropped image is generated from an image of a predetermined frame.

For the selection of the effect pattern used to generate the cropped image, the hit-time selection table or the off-time selection table prepared for selecting the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is selected, and the effect pattern in the first suggestion effect is selected. It is done with reference as in the case. The control is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The frame used for generating the cutout image (that is, a predetermined frame including a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state) is specified in advance by the frame number, the time, and the like in the moving image data. Further, the cutout area such as the area AR1 in the image of the frame to be cut out is specified in advance by the coordinates on the image or the like.

The cutout region does not necessarily have to be a rectangular region such as the region AR1 and may be a non-rectangular region such as a circle. Further, the number of cutout regions may be one or a plurality. When a plurality of cutout regions are provided, the shape of each cutout region does not necessarily have to be all regions having the same shape (for example, all rectangular shapes) as in regions AR1 to AR3, and there are two or more types. Areas of the shape of the above may be mixed.

The sub-control board 940 generates a cut-out image by cutting out a region specified in advance from the image of the frame specified in advance. The timing at which the sub-control board 940 generates a cutout image is such that the sub-control board 940 mainly controls the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the unit game (that is, the fluctuation display of the special symbol) related to the target special symbol from the main control board 920. It may be the timing received from the substrate 920, or may be a predetermined timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621. Further, in a configuration in which a period during which the operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated is provided for the display of the second suggestion effect, the sub-control board 940 generates a cut-out image at the timing when the period ends. It may be a configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the image (that is, the cut-out image) cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is subjected to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction, and the processed cut-out image is processed. (For example, image 821, etc.) is displayed in the second suggestion effect. The processing of the cut-out image (for example, deformation, enlargement / reduction, etc.) and the display of the processed cut-out image are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the images 821, 822 and 823 appearing (displayed) in the second suggestion effect have a rectangular shape corresponding to the shapes of the cutout regions AR1, AR2, and AR3. It is displayed as a rhombus-shaped image in front view, with the front appearing to face the lower right direction. In this way, by displaying the images 821, 822, 823 so as to be oriented in substantially the same direction different from the front direction, the display orientation of at least one of these images 821, 822, 823 is displayed. It is possible to give an orderly impression as compared with the case where is displayed so as to be different from the display orientation of other images.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, the images 821, 822, 823 appearing in the second suggestion effect are enlarged or enlarged at different scaling ratios (enlargement or reduction ratios) with respect to the corresponding cropped images. This is a reduced image. Specifically, the size of the cropped image increases in the order of the image obtained by cutting out the region AR1, the image obtained by cropping the region AR3, and the image obtained by cropping the region AR2. Each cropped image of is enlarged or reduced in the order of image 822, image 822, and image 823.

It is not always necessary to enlarge or reduce all the cropped images, and some of the plurality of cropped images are enlarged or reduced at different scaling factors or all at the same scaling factor. May be good. Further, a part or all of the plurality of cropped images may be enlarged or reduced at different scaling ratios in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of processed cut-out images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) are configured to appear (display) at the same time in the second suggestion effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19 (B), images 821, 822, 823 based on an image (cut out image) cut out from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (A) are all in the lower right. The images 823, 821, and 822 are displayed side by side in this order from the front to the back.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed cutout images appear at the same time in the second suggestion effect, at least one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image appear. Some parts appear to overlap (ie, appear to overlap). The display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 are displayed so as to overlap each other, and a part of the image 821 and the image 823 are displayed so as to overlap each other. As a result, the content (drawing content) drawn in the area where the image 821 overlaps in the image 822 and the area where the image 823 overlaps in the image 821 becomes difficult to see (invisible).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the processed cutout image of 1 and the other processed cutout image are displayed so as to overlap at least a part, the drawing content becomes difficult to see due to the overlap. The display position of one of the images is moved so that the drawn contents that were difficult to see can be made visible. The display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, after a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 are displayed so as to overlap each other, the overlapping image 821 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the drawn contents. The display position of the image 822 is moved to the left (direction of arrow M). As the overlap between the image 822 and the image 821 becomes smaller, the area in which the drawn content becomes visible in the image 822 increases. As a result, the player can recognize that the image 822 is, for example, an image including a left hand and a part of the flag 801A held in the left hand, and that the flag 801A has a cat pattern drawn on it. Will be.

Here, since the character CA1 is configured in the same manner as the character CA2 except for the pattern drawn on the flag 801A, the player recognizes that the pattern drawn on the flag 801A is a cat by moving the image 822. If it can be done, it becomes possible to infer that the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is the character CA1. Therefore, the second suggestion is made so that the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state can be easily estimated according to the passage of time after the cut-out image processed in the second suggestion effect appears. In the production, the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is improved.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the image including a part of the character that appears in the second suggestion effect and suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the first suggestion effect is the first suggestion effect. The configuration generated based on the image cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern, that is, the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is diverted to the generation of the image appearing in the second suggestion effect. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the storage amount of moving image data (image data), and it is easy to reduce the need to develop production images for the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, and the development cost is reduced accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it corresponds to an image including a part of a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, which is cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect. Since the image (specifically, the image obtained by subjecting the cut-out image to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction) is displayed in the second suggestion effect, the character appearing in the first suggestion effect. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state suggested by the above can be similarly suggested in the second suggestion effect. Further, since the suggestion of the expectation degree by the first suggestion effect and the suggestion of the expectation degree by the second suggestion effect are realized with different appearances, it is necessary to develop an effect image for each of the second suggestion effects. It is possible to increase the variation of suggestion production while suppressing the cost.

Here, the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is an image corresponding to an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state that appears in the first suggestion effect. The amount of information contained in the image is smaller than that in the case where the entire character is displayed, and it is difficult to infer the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

As a result, the difficulty of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect differs between the case where the first suggestion effect is displayed and the case where the second suggestion effect is displayed. When the 1st suggestion effect or the 2nd suggestion effect is displayed, it is possible to improve the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. Can be improved.

In particular, since the image cut out from the moving image data corresponding to the effect pattern of the first suggestion effect is processed such as deformation or enlargement / reduction is displayed in the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect is displayed. It is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in. Also in this respect, it is possible to preferably improve the playability in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is estimated from the content of each suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed.

Further, since each image corresponding to the plurality of cutout images cut out from the plurality of areas is displayed at the same time in the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect is compared with the case where one cutout image is displayed. It is easy to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the character corresponding to the image from being too difficult to guess from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed cutout images appear at the same time in the second suggestion effect, at least one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image appear. Since the images are displayed so as to overlap (that is, appear to overlap) in a part, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the overlapped images. Also in this respect, it is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect, so that when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed, It is possible to preferably improve the playability in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is estimated from the content of each suggestion effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the processed cutout image of 1 and the other processed cutout image are displayed so as to overlap at least a part, the drawing content is difficult to see due to the overlap. Since the display position of the image that has become is moved so that the drawn contents that were difficult to see can be visually recognized, a plurality of processed cutout images initially appeared in the second suggestion effect at the same time. Depending on the passage of time from, the difficulty of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of the second suggestion effect can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve the playability of estimating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is displayed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, instead of the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the stroke amount by the pushing operation is variably configured by the operating mechanism 860. It is equipped with an operating device 1261.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fifth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the fifth embodiments.

FIG. 20 is a schematic view for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic view showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the operation position. In FIG. 20, for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the internal configuration of the pressing operation device 1261, the base 851 and the operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850, the operation cover member 870, and the bottom member 880 are cross-sectionald, respectively. It is illustrated by the shape. Hatching is omitted for these cross sections.

Further, in FIGS. 20 and 21, for reference, the position of the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the surface that the player can contact around the operation cover member 870 in the front block 102) is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line. It is illustrated by Q. That is, the upper side of the alternate long and short dash line Q indicates that a part (operation cover member 870) of the operation device 1261 is exposed (protruding) upward from the surface of the front block 102, and the lower portion of the alternate long and short dash line Q is. It shows that the operating device 1261 is buried below the surface of the front block 102.
Further, in FIG. 21, for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the drawings, the bottom member 880 is not shown, and the region below the alternate long and short dash line Q in the operating device 1261 (that is, below the surface of the front block 102). The area buried in) is shown by the dotted line.

Like the pressing operation device 261, the pressing operation device 1261 is a device capable of a pushing operation by a player. As shown in FIG. 20, the pressing operation device 1261 includes a button operation unit 850, an operating mechanism 860, an operation cover member 870, and a bottom member 880.
The button operation unit 850 includes a base 851, an operated unit 852, and a spring member 853. The substrate 851 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a bottom surface on the lower end side. The operated portion 852 is configured in a cylindrical shape that can be accommodated on the inner peripheral side of the substrate 851. The spring member 853 is, for example, a coil spring, which is interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851. The spring member 853 functions as an urging means for urging the operated portion 852 upward.

An inwardly projecting protrusion 851A is provided on the upper end side of the substrate 851, and an outwardly projecting protrusion 852A overlaps the projecting portion 851A on the lower end side of the operated portion. It is provided at the position.

As a result, the operated portion 852 urged upward by the spring member 853 is maintained in a state in which the protruding portion 851A of the base 851 serves as a stopper and the protruding portion 852A is in contact with the protruding portion 851A from the lower side. To. In the button operating portion 850, the position where the protruding portion 852A abuts on the protruding portion 851A of the substrate 851 from below is the initial position of the operated portion 852.

When the operated portion 852 is pushed in (that is, when the operated portion 852 is pressed downward), the operated portion 852 resists the urging force of the spring member 853 (that is, the spring member 853). Move downward (while deforming). After that, when the pushing operation on the operated portion 852 is completed (that is, when the operated portion 852 becomes unloaded), the operated portion 852 returns to the initial position by the urging force of the spring member 853.

The button operation unit 850 includes a detection sensor 854 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the operated unit 852 that has been moved downward by the pushing operation is located at a predetermined position. .. The detection sensor 854 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. Hereinafter, the position of the operated portion 852 detected by the detection sensor 854 is also referred to as “the maximum pressing position of the operated portion 852 by the spring member 853” or the like. The detection sensor 854 outputs a high level signal when the operated portion 852 reaches the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853, and outputs a low level signal when the operated portion 852 moves from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853. Output.

When the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to the high level signal, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 has reached the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853, and the signal falls to the low level signal. In this case, it is determined that the operated portion 852 has moved from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853.

The sub-control board 940 sets the maximum pressing position flag (a part of the area of the RAM) to ON when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal. The sub-control board 940 sets the maximum pressing position flag to off when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 drops to a low level signal. As a result, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the maximum pressing position flag is set to ON.

The operating mechanism 860 is provided on the lower side with respect to the button operation unit 850. As shown in FIG. 20, the operating mechanism 860 includes a rack 861 which is a rod-shaped body on a geared flat plate, a pinion (gear) 862 that meshes with the teeth of the rack 861, and a motor for rotating the pinion 862. It is equipped with 863. The motor 863 is, for example, a DC motor.

The actuating mechanism 860 rotates (drives) the motor 863 to rotate the pinion 862, whereby the position of the button operating unit 850 can be positioned on the rack 861 without the player's operation on the operated unit 852. It can be moved in a direction along the tooth muscle direction and in a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the motor 863.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the operating mechanism 860 has a button in a direction substantially the same as the direction in which the operated portion 852 moves (that is, the vertical direction) due to the deformation (reconstruction by compression or urging) of the spring member 853. The operation unit 850 can be moved. The button operation unit 850 can be moved in the vertical direction within the movement range of the rack 861 with respect to the pinion 862 in the operating mechanism 860.

The operating mechanism 860 includes an encoder (not shown) capable of detecting the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863. When the sub-control board 940 controls the movement (position change) of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 detects the detection result by the encoder and controls the operation of the motor 863 according to the current arrangement position.

The operating mechanism 860 is configured to be able to hold (maintain) the button operation unit 850 at a predetermined position by controlling the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 so that the detection result by the encoder becomes constant. As a result, the unloaded button operation unit 850 (button operation unit 850 in the state where the operated unit 852 is not operated) that the player does not touch the operation cover member 870 is within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860. Can be held (maintained) at a predetermined position in. The position where the no-load button operation unit 850 is held by the operating mechanism 860 is also referred to as a "neutral position".

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating mechanism 860 is set to a position corresponding to the satisfied condition among a plurality of predetermined positions as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850. The button operation unit 850 with no load is held. That is, it is configured to change according to the condition that the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 is established.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the button operation unit 850 in the neutral position (more specifically, the height from the surface of the pachinko machine 100) is a special symbol (first special symbol, The unit game related to the second special symbol) is configured to increase as the number of hold times increases.

When the button operation unit 850 is located in the neutral position, the pressing operation device 1261 is also located in the neutral position. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position is also special. It increases as the number of times the unit game related to the symbol is held increases.

Further, as described above, the operating mechanism 860 has a configuration in which the button operating unit 850 can be held at a predetermined position by the torque (holding force) of the motor 863, so that a force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operating unit 850. When added, the operating mechanism 860 is operated without electrically driving the motor 863 by the force, whereby the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

For example, when a lower force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operating unit 850 (that is, when the button operating unit 850 is pushed down by a force exceeding the torque), the button operating unit 850 is lowered by the force. Can be moved to the side. Further, when an upward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operating unit 850 (that is, when the button operating unit 850 is pulled up by a force exceeding the torque), the button operating unit 850 is moved upward by the force. Can be moved to the side.

As a result, in the pressing operation device 1261 of the present embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 (that is, the cover in the button operating unit 850). The stroke amount S2 of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 (the amount of movement from the initial position of the operation unit 852 to the maximum pressing position) (the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 from the neutral position of the button operation unit 850). The amount of movement to the position at the lower end of the above) can be added.

The operation cover member 870 is a member that covers (covers) the button operation portion 850 from the outside, and is configured in a cylindrical shape having an operation surface on the surface on the upper end side. The operation cover member 870 has translucency, and emits light emitted by a light emitting body (not shown) such as an LED arranged inside the operation cover member 870 (for example, the base 851 of the button operation unit 850). It is configured to be transparent.

Since the surface of the operation cover member 870 on the back side with respect to the operation surface (that is, the surface facing the button operation unit 850) is in contact with the operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850, the player can use the operation cover member 870 of the operation cover member 870. When the pushing operation is performed on the operation surface, the operation cover member 870 and the operated portion 852 are integrally moved downward.

As a result, the pushing operation performed by the player on the operating surface of the operation cover member 870 becomes a pushing operation on the operated portion 852, and the operated portion 852 is pushed downward against the urging force of the spring member 853. The button operation unit 850 can be moved downward by the operation of the operating mechanism 860.

As shown in FIG. 21, a hold count display unit 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870. The hold count display unit 870A corresponds to the numbers from "0" to "8" corresponding to the hold count of the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each of these numbers. A line segment as a scale is drawn.

In the hold count display unit 870A, the numbers corresponding to the hold count of the unit game related to the special symbol are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom, and the button operation unit 850 according to the current hold count. In the neutral position, the numbers corresponding to the number of holdings are drawn so as to be exposed from the surface (dashed line Q) of the pachinko machine 100.

As a result, for example, when the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held is zero, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the button operation unit 850 sets the number of times held (that is, the number of times held is zero). By being placed in the corresponding neutral position, only the number “0” corresponding to the number of holds drawn on the hold count display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Further, for example, when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 21B, the button operation unit 850 corresponds to the number of holdings (that is, the number of holdings of 3). By being placed in the neutral position, the number “3” corresponding to the number of holds drawn on the hold count display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers from "0" to "3" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Further, for example, when the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is 8, as shown in FIG. 21C, the button operation unit 850 corresponds to the number of holdings (that is, the number of holdings which is 8). By being arranged in the neutral position, the number “8” corresponding to the number of holdings drawn on the holding number display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers from "0" to "8" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 increases as the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol increases, the player can use the pachinko machine among the numbers drawn on the number of times of holding display unit 870A. By visually recognizing the number displayed on the portion exposed from the surface of 100, the current number of holds can be grasped. That is, the pressing operation device 1261 can function as a display device for displaying the number of times the unit game is held for the special symbol, similar to the special symbol holding display device 476 and 477.

It will be described back to FIG. The bottom member 880 is a member that constitutes the bottom portion of the pressing operation device 1261. The bottom member 880 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a groove 880A capable of accommodating the side surface of the operation cover member 870 is provided on the peripheral side thereof. The groove 880A also functions as a guide for guiding the operation cover member 870 in the vertical direction. The operation cover member 870 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction only within a certain range upward and to be provided with a stopper mechanism for limiting the movement of the operation cover member 870 to the upper side by a certain amount or more, but the illustration is omitted. ing.

The pressing operation device 1261 includes a detection sensor 890 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the button operation unit 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860. .. The detection sensor 890 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. The detection sensor 890 does not necessarily have to be provided, and the detection position by the detection sensor 890 may be detected by using the information of the sensor (encoder) capable of detecting the upper and lower positions of the button operation unit 850.

The detection sensor 890 outputs a high level signal when the button operation unit 850 reaches the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operation mechanism 860, and the button operation unit 850 is from the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operation mechanism 860. Outputs a low level signal when moved.

The sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 has reached the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, and the signal is low level. When the signal is dropped, it is determined that the button operation unit 850 has moved from the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860.

The sub-control board 940 sets the lower end position flag (a part of the area of the RAM) to ON when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal. The sub-control board 940 sets the lower end position flag to off when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 falls to the low level signal. As a result, the sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 when the lower end position flag is set to ON.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the sub-control board 940, the button operating portion 850 is located at the lower end of the moving range by the operating mechanism 860, and the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853. Is generated, it is determined that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated.

More specifically, when the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to the high level signal, if the lower end position flag is set to ON, the pressing operation device 1261 is operated. judge. Similarly, when the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to the high level signal, if the maximum pressing position flag is set to ON, the sub-control board 940 determines that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated. To do.

When the pressing operation device 1261 (button operating unit 850) is set to the neutral position at a position where the button operating unit 850 is above the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 has the pressing operating device 1261. When it is determined that the operation has been performed, the button operation unit 850 controls the operation mechanism 860 so as to return to the neutral position. As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position.

When the button operation unit 850 is moved by applying a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operation unit 850, the motor 863 is rotated by the rotation of the pinion 862. The rotation speed can be detected by an encoder (not shown) included in the operating mechanism 860. The sub-control board 940 determines that the rotation speed of the motor 863 detected by the encoder is zero when it is determined that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal in a situation where the lower end position flag is off. If so, the operating mechanism 860 is controlled so that the button operation unit 850 returns to the current neutral position.

As a result, even though the button operation unit 850 is operated (pushing operation) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the operation is performed before the button operation unit 850 reaches the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860. The pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position even when the above is completed.

When the pressing operation device 1261 is returned to the current neutral position, the moving speed of the button operating unit 850 that moves toward the neutral position within the moving range of the button operating unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 is a constant moving speed. The movement speed may be different depending on the state at that time.

Next, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 configured as described above will be described. When the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the position where the button operation unit 850 is the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20A), the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position is performed. (That is, when the pushing operation is performed on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870), the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed down by the position change of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853. ..

Therefore, the stroke amount when the pressing operation device 1261 whose neutral position is the position where the button operation unit 850 is the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 is pushed down to the situation where it is determined that the operation is performed by the sub-control board 940. Corresponds to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853, as shown in FIG. 20 (B).

On the other hand, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is a position where the button operation unit 850 is on the upper side of the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20C), the neutral position is set. When a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 and the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is larger than the urging force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the pressing operation device 1261 first starts with the spring member. After the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of 853 is pushed down to the maximum pressing position (see FIG. 20 (D)), it is pushed down by the position change of the button operating portion 850 by the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20 (E)).

Therefore, when the pressing operation device 1261 whose neutral position is the position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860 is pushed down to a situation where it is determined that the operation has been performed by the sub-control board 940. As shown in FIGS. 20D and 20E, the stroke amount of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 and the stroke amount S2 of the button operating portion 850 by the operating mechanism 860 That is, (stroke amount S1 + stroke amount S2).

The stroke amount S2 of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860 is the amount of movement from the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 to the lower end of the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operation mechanism 860. It is a value that fluctuates due to fluctuations in the neutral position of 850. More specifically, the stroke amount S2 is a value that increases as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 becomes higher. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 261 of the present embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pressing operation increases as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 increases.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261. More specifically, FIG. 22 is a graph in which the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 is on the horizontal axis, and the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation is on the vertical axis.

In the present embodiment, the position of the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 in the pressing operation device 1261 is referred to as the “operation position of the pressing operation device 1261”. The position of the operated portion 852 of the button operating portion 850 may be set as the “operating position of the pressing operating device 1261”.

When the button operation unit 850 performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20A), which is set to the neutral position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860, the button operating unit 850 is in the neutral position. From the operation position A1 of the pressing operation device 1261 to reaching the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20B) in a situation where it is determined that the operation (pushing operation) has been performed by the sub-control board 940. The reaction force to the pushing operation in the section (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) is the spring constant of the spring member 853 as it approaches the operation position Amin from the operation position A1 as shown by the straight line J1 shown in FIG. 21 (A). It increases linearly with the inclination.

Next, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is raised and the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position is moved from the operation position A1 to the operation position A2 (see FIG. 20C), the neutral position is concerned. A case where a pushing operation is performed on the position pressing operation device 1261 will be described.

In such a case, when the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is larger than the urging force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the operated portion 852 is maximally pressed from the operating position A2 of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position. The reaction force for the pushing operation in the section up to the operating position A2x (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20C), which is the position, is the reaction force of the straight line J2 shown in FIG. As described above, as the operating position A1 approaches the operating position Ax, the inclination of the spring constant of the spring member 853 linearly increases.

The section (that is, the stroke) from the operation position A2x to the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20B) in the situation where it is determined that the operation (pushing operation) is performed by the sub-control board 940. The reaction force for the pushing operation in the section of the amount S2) is a value corresponding to the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 in the section.

Since the torque of the motor 863 depends on the current value that energizes the motor 863, the relationship between the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is determined by the current value that energizes the motor 863. It is possible to make various modes by controlling the above, and it is possible to set a plurality of types so as to have different operation feelings according to the game situation and the lottery result.

For example, when the torque of the motor 863 is constant regardless of the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261, the reaction force against the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is operated as shown by the straight line J3 shown in FIG. 21 (A). A certain pattern can be included in the section from the position A2x to the operation position Amin.

Alternatively, when the torque of the motor 863 is linearly increased as the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 approaches the operating position Amin, the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is shown in FIG. 21 (A). Like the two-dot chain line J4, the configuration may include a pattern that linearly increases as the operating position A2x approaches the operating position Amin.

The pattern of not only increasing the torque of the motor 863 but also decreasing the torque of the motor 863 may be included. In such a case, the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can be reduced as the operating position A2x approaches the operating position Amin. Further, a pattern that combines an increase and a decrease in the torque of the motor 863 may be included. Further, the increase or decrease of the torque of the motor 863 does not necessarily have to be linear, and may include a pattern in which the torque of the motor 863 increases or decreases in a curve, or a maximum that decreases after the torque increases. It may be a pattern including a portion including a portion, or a pattern including a minimum portion that increases after the torque decreases.

Further, a pattern in which the change in torque of the motor 863 becomes discontinuous in the section between the operation position A2x and the operation position Amin (specifically, a pattern in which the change in torque includes a step and becomes discontinuous before and after the predetermined position). It may be. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 becomes discontinuous because the operation position does not change at the operation position X and rises sharply. The change in the reaction force with respect to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position X to the operating position Amin may be constant in the section as shown by the straight line J5 shown in FIG. 21 (B). A pattern that increases as the operating position approaches Amin may be included, such as the alternate long and short dash line J6 shown in 21 (B).

Further, the mode of change of the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position A2x to the operating position X, and the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position X to the operating position Amin. A pattern having the same change mode may be included, or these change modes may have different configurations.

Further, the operation position where the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is discontinuous does not necessarily have to be one as shown in FIG. 21 (B), and the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is not necessarily one. A pattern in which a plurality of (that is, two or more) operation positions for discontinuing the reaction force may be included.

Further, it is not always necessary to discontinuously change the torque change of the motor 863 at the operation position X (that is, discontinuously change the reaction force to the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261), and before and after the operating position X. In the pattern in which the change mode of the reaction force with respect to the push operation to the pressing operation device 1261 is different, a pattern in which each change mode continuously changes at the operation position X may be included.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the button operating unit 850 is moved by applying a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operating unit 850 by an encoder (not shown) provided in the operating mechanism 860. The rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863 can be detected. The sub-control board 940 can detect the pushing speed (moving speed of the pressing operation device 1261) in the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 and the moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 based on each value detected by the encoder.

Here, a target value is set in advance for the moving speed and moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 that has been pushed in (that is, the moving speed and moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 that is the target value are set to the sub-control board 940. The moving speed or moving amount of the pressing operation device 1261 detected by the sub-control board 940 based on each value detected by the encoder is stored in advance as a target value. Alternatively, when the movement amount is exceeded, a predetermined effect or display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, or a pattern in which a predetermined accessory provided on the game board 400 operates may be included.

Specifically, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the sub-control board 940 determines the rotation direction of the motor 863 detected by the encoder. The movement speed or movement amount of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected based on the rotation position and the rotation speed, and the detected movement speed or movement amount is compared with the movement speed or movement amount stored as a target value in advance. When it is determined that the detected movement speed or movement amount exceeds the movement speed or movement amount stored as a target value in advance, a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, or the game board 400 is displayed. A pattern for operating a predetermined accessory provided may be included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 according to a predetermined target value, thereby improving the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100. ..

The target value may be set to either the movement speed or the movement amount, a combination of both, or the button operation unit 850 held at a constant height position. It may be the pushing operation force. Further, the target value may be set by a threshold value such as whether or not the target value is exceeded, or may be maintained at a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range for a certain period of time or longer. The operation may be an operation with a target for which an operation time with the operation is set.

Further, it is preferable to set a plurality of types of the target value in the pressing operation device 1261, the height position of the neutral position, the magnitude of the reaction force, and the pattern of change. Then, depending on the conditions based on the game situation (for example, the number of holds, the time of the game, the number of times a predetermined effect (for example, the display of a specific character) is executed), which of the plurality of types is selected, or a big hit lottery is performed. Depending on the conditions based on the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, etc., which of the multiple types should be selected, for example, the result of winning or failing related to the symbol lottery and the possibility of transition to the special gaming state (expectation, reliability). ) Is preferably used as an effect to suggest to the player.

For example, since the sub-control board 940 can detect the amount of movement of the pressing operation device 1261 that has been pushed in based on each value detected by the encoder, the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is related to the special symbol. In a configuration that changes according to the number of times a unit game is held, the sub-control board 940 pushes the pressing operation device 1261 with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, and has a speed below a certain level. When a pushing operation with a target value of (for example, a moving speed of 0.5 seconds or less per stroke for one scale) is executed, a special symbol lottery (first special) is included in the currently held unit game. If the unit game that has been won in the symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is included, the number of holds corresponding to the unit game that has won the special symbol lottery has a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). The operating mechanism 860 may be controlled so as to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at the corresponding position.

When the unit games currently held include the unit games that have been won in the special symbol lottery, the motor 863 is located at the position corresponding to the number of holds corresponding to the unit games that have been won in the special symbol lottery. The probability of discontinuously changing the torque of is greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%.

In this way, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the content of each unit game held (for example, whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won). The movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the change in the operation feeling due to the discontinuous change in the torque of the motor 863 during the movement of the pressing operation device 1261 and the pattern of the reaction force against the movement) change according to the movement mode. In the above, it is possible to provide the game property in which the contents such as the lottery result of each unit game held are estimated based on the movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 that can be pushed by the player has a button operation unit 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853, and the button operation. It is provided with an operating mechanism 860 that enables the vertical movement of the unit 850, the operating mechanism 860 can hold the button operating unit 850 in a predetermined neutral position, and the torque of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 ( By applying a lower force (pushing operation force) exceeding the holding force) to the button operation unit 850, the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

Thereby, the stroke amount due to the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be changed according to the change of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the neutral position of the button operation unit 850). As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion 852 as compared with the case where the moving amount of the operated portion 852 is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the spring member 853. Therefore, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (the neutral position of the button operation unit 850) increases as the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held increases. .. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the holding number of times by visually recognizing the pressing operation device 1261, and recognizes the holding number of times by the height of the button operation unit 850 even in the situation where the game is played with the line of sight down. It can be made easier.

Further, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 becomes longer as the number of holdings increases. As a result, the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion 852 can be made different according to the number of times of holding, so that the player can feel the holding by pushing the pressing operation device 1261. The number of times can be estimated (recognized). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game property in which the number of times of holding a unit game related to a special symbol can be estimated (recognized) by the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 without visually recognizing the information on the number of times of holding. it can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value by changing the current value of energizing the motor 863. With the 860, the operation feeling with respect to the operated unit 852 (operation feeling with respect to the button operation unit 850) can be variously changed in the section in which the button operation unit 850 can move in the vertical direction.

For example, when the torque of the motor 863 is constant within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 regardless of the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 (the operation amount of the pressing operation device 1261), the pressing operation device Since the reaction force for the pushing operation to the 1261 can be made constant within the moving range, the player can perform the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 with a constant force within the range.

Further, when the torque of the motor 863 is linearly or non-linearly increased or decreased as the operating amount (pushing amount) of the pressing operating device 1261 increases within the moving range of the button operating unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860, Since the reaction force for the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 1261 can be increased or decreased linearly or non-linearly within the movement range, the player can increase or decrease the force for pushing the pressing operation device 1261 within the range. The pressing operation device 1261 can be operated while increasing or decreasing the pressing force linearly or non-linearly.

As a result, the operation feeling of the pressing operation device 1261 in the section where the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860 is an operation feeling that the pushing operation can be performed with a constant force, or increases as the pushing amount increases. It can be changed in various ways, such as a feeling of operation that requires the pushing operation to be performed with a decreasing force. This makes it possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion 852. In this respect as well, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved.

Further, by changing the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 by controlling the current value of energizing the motor 863 according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the operated portion 852 can be moved. The feeling of operation when operated can be changed according to the content of the production.

For example, when the effect of injecting air into a balloon with a manual air pump is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during variable display, the torque of the motor 863 is constant according to the depiction of operating the manual air pump. By controlling the current value so as to be, the operation feeling of the pushing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 can be made constant as if the manual air pump is operated. Then, when the display result of the variable display is a winning or suggests to the player that the variable display has a high degree of expectation, a reaction force is generated until the end of the production, and the balloon is maximized by the pushing operation. While describing that it has grown, when it is lost or suggests to the player that it is a variable display with low expectation, there is a hole in the balloon and the balloon shrinks, along with the shrinking display The torque may be reduced to minimize the reaction force, and the balloon may be described so as not to inflate.

In addition, when the effect of the character trying to open the tightly closed door is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display, the character pushes the door to open the door. By controlling the current value so that the torque of the motor 863 decreases sharply at the moment when the door is opened, the operation feeling of the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 can be sharply lightened as if the door was opened. .. Then, when the display result of the variable display is a winning or suggests to the player that the variable display has a high degree of expectation, the torque is reduced to minimize the reaction force at the end of the production, and the door is opened. If you want to describe that the character showing the lucky state is behind the door, but if you lose it or suggest to the player that it is a variable display with low expectation, the reaction force is applied until the end of the production. It may be generated so that the door does not open.

The effect corresponding to the display result of the variable display is not limited to the above, and the state of being pushed to the bottom is continued for a certain period of time, and then the button operation unit 850 is maintained at the lower end position according to the degree of expectation or whether or not it is correct. The position after the operation may be different, the magnitude of the operation force (reaction force) may be different, or a combination thereof may be used. Good.

In this way, pressing is performed by controlling the current value of energizing the motor 863 so that the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 changes according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The operation feeling of the pushing operation on the operation device 1261 can be made to match the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she is participating in a predetermined effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value of energizing the motor 863, the button operation unit 850 is moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860. The torque of the motor 863 can be discontinuously (or stepped or suddenly changed) at a predetermined position within the movable section.

As a result, when the player operates the operated portion 852 with a force exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860, the button operating portion 850 can be moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860 within the section. At a predetermined position, the feeling of operation with respect to the operated portion 852 (pressing operation device 1261) changes discontinuously. Since the operation feeling for the pressing operation device 1261 changes discontinuously at a predetermined position, the operation feeling for the pressing operation device 1261 is unlikely to be monotonous, whereby the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved. ..

Further, in the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the position of the button operation unit 850 is configured to be changeable by the operating mechanism 860, and the elastic body is deformed as a control of the sub-control board 940. It can be configured to include a control to move the button operation unit 850 at a speed at which an inertial force is generated. That is, by moving the button operation unit 850 in a predetermined direction (upward or downward direction) by the operating mechanism 860 and then suddenly stopping the movement, the button operation unit 850 is attached to the base 851 via the spring member 853. The supported portion 852 can be moved along a predetermined direction (for example, upward) by the inertial force received by the operated portion 852 due to the sudden stop of the button operation portion 850, and is in a predetermined direction. And, it is also possible to make a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, downward direction).

As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 functions not only as a device for causing the player to perform a predetermined operation (specifically, a pushing operation), but also as a device capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion 852. Can be made to. Since the pressing operation device 1261 can form a part of the effect, the interest in the pressing operation device 1261 can be improved, and thereby the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be improved.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. The pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment is devised so that the operation feeling and the operation feeling (operation feeling) of the pressing operation device 1261 of the sixth embodiment can be suitably realized.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to sixth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the sixth embodiments.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic view for explaining the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 24 (A) is a top view schematically showing the vicinity of the pressing operation device 1261, and FIG. 24 (B) is a pressing operation device 1261 viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG. 24 (A). It is a side view of the vicinity.

In FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B)), the pressing operation device 1261, the case 893 accommodating the pressing operation device 1261, and the hand rest stand are used for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawings. 895 is illustrated. Further, in each of the drawings of FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B), for reference, arrows indicating the front-back direction, the left-right direction, or the up-down direction with respect to the illustrated contents are shown.

Further, in FIG. 24A, for reference, the position of the front plate 222 with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 and the like is shown by a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 24B, for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the drawings, the partial cross sections of the case 893 and the hand rest 895 on the upper end side are shown, and the hatching for each of these cross sections is omitted. There is. Further, in FIG. 24B, for reference, the alternate long and short dash line QA showing the vertical position of the opening R on the opening surface is shown.

Further, in FIG. 24, for reference, two examples of a player's hand that operates the pressing operation device 1261 (the pushing operation is performed on the operation surface 870B) and a part of the forearm portion that is continuous with the hand. It is illustrated by the alternate long and short dash line TE. In the present embodiment, the "hand" is a part on the tip side of the wrist and is composed of a palm and a finger, and the "forearm part" is a part continuous with the hand from the wrist to the elbow. Indicates the part of.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the input operation device 260 is configured to include a pressing operation device 1261 and a selection operation device 263. The input operation device 260 may be configured to include a rotation operation device 262 in addition to the pressing operation device 1261 and the selection operation device 263.

As shown in FIG. 23, the pressing operation device 1261 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper protruding portion 217. On the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the front side with respect to the pressing operation device 1261), a hand rest 895 on which the player can place a hand (for example, a right hand) for operating the pressing operation device 1261 is provided. It is provided. The hand rest 895 is a stand extending forward from the case 893 that houses the pressing operation device 1261.

The pressing operation device 1261 is housed in the case 893 through an opening R opened upward. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), the pressing operation device 1261 is an operation on the upper end side surface of the operation cover member 870 and touched by a player when performing a pushing operation. The neutral position is such that the surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R (the opening surface located on the alternate long and short dash line QA) accommodating the pressing operation device 1261 in the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261. It is composed.

In this embodiment, the case where the opening R is arranged at a position that coincides with the plane is illustrated, but the opening R may be arranged at a height position that does not coincide with the plane. For example, the operation surface 870B may be configured so that the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening in the moving direction of the operation surface 870B is a neutral position, and in this case, at least one of the peripheral edges of the opening. A position that is substantially equal to a part of the portion on the side closer to the player may be configured to be a neutral position.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the hand rest 895 is operated by a player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (pushing operation is performed on the operation surface 870B). It is configured so that at least a part of a part of the hand (more specifically, a part excluding a part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B of the hand) and a forearm part continuous with the hand can be placed. To.

That is, the hand rest 895 is a support base that allows the player to manually push the operation surface 870B and support at least a part of the hand and the forearm portion continuous with the hand from below. Has the function of. In the example shown in FIG. 24, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line TE, a part of the wrist side of the player's hand and a part of the wrist side of the forearm are supported by the hand rest 895.

Therefore, the player places and supports at least a part of the hand performing the pushing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 and the forearm portion continuous with the hand on the hand rest 895. The operation surface 870B can be operated while allowing the operation surface 870B to be operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), both the upper surface of the operation surface 870B and the hand rest 895 are substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 (the opening surface located at the alternate long and short dash line QA) in the vertical direction. In the position configuration, the palm is placed on the hand rest 895, and the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) is moved up and down with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum to move the palm up and down with respect to the operation surface 870B. The pushing operation can be performed. Further, by placing the hand on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum, the movement of the operation surface 870B makes it easier for the hand to move up and down (more specifically, the fingertip side). Therefore, the operation surface 870B can be easily moved, and the feeling of movement of the movement can be easily felt.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is located at a position substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction. Compared with the case where the operation surface 870B protrudes upward with respect to the opening surface of the opening R, the player who performs the operation makes it difficult to perform a powerful pushing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B. Can be done.

Therefore, in a configuration such as the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in which the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is the neutral position, the pressing operation device 1261 is used. The torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20) is not a forceful pushing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B to the player who pushes the operation surface 870B of the above. ), The operation surface 870B can be pushed in slowly.

Therefore, when a lower force (pushing operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed from the neutral position (pressing). In the pachinko machine 100 having a configuration capable of moving in the direction of), the player can suitably experience the operation feeling of pushing (pressing), which is difficult to feel due to the momentum of the pushing operation. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (which performs a pushing operation on the operation surface 870B) operates the pressing operation device 1261 on the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261. At least a part of the hand (more specifically, the part excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B of the hand) and the forearm continuous with the hand can be placed. A hand rest 895 (which can be supported from below) is provided.

As a result, at least a part of the part of the player's hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B and the forearm part continuous with the hand can be supported by the hand rest 895. The hand can be stabilized, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing a pushing operation at an inappropriate position on the operation surface 870B.

Further, since at least a part of the part of the player's hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B and the forearm part continuous with the hand can be supported by the hand rest 895, the hand and the hand and the forearm part can be supported. The strength of the pushing operation with respect to the operating surface 870B can be suppressed as compared with the case where the forearm portion moves freely. Therefore, it is difficult for the player who pushes the operation surface 870B (operates the pressing operation device 1261) to perform a vigorous operation (for example, hitting the operation surface 870B) on the operation surface 870B. Can be done.

As a result, the player who pushes the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is made to perform the pushing operation of pushing the operation surface 870B slowly against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860. be able to. Also in this respect, when a lower force (pushing operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed from the neutral position. In the pachinko machine 100 having a configuration that can move in the direction of operation (pressing), it is difficult for the player to experience the operation feeling of pushing (pressing), which is difficult to experience due to the momentum of the pushing operation. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), from the length in the front-rear direction (length W1) in the region in front of the front plate 222, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 The length excluding the length (length WA) in the front-rear direction from the front end of the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261) to the rear end of the hand rest 895 in the region including the 870B and the hand rest 895 (that is, the length WA). The length WB) is shorter than the length (length W2) in the front-rear direction of the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261). That is, the region of the pressing operation device 1261 including the operation surface 870B and the hand rest 895 occupies a relatively large region in the front-rear direction of the region on the front side of the front plate 222.

In such a configuration, the size of the operation surface 870B is set to be relatively large in the region on the front side of the front plate 222, whereby the player can easily operate the operation surface 870B. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 24A, the operation surface 870B occupies approximately half in the front-rear direction in the region in front of the front plate 222, or the player has a plurality of fingers (for example, thumbs). It is a size that can be operated with four fingers) except for, and is relatively large.

As described above, even when the operation surface 870B (pressing operation device 1261) is relatively large in the region on the front side of the front plate 222, the support portion is provided so that at least a part thereof is on the front side of the pressing operation device 1261. Is provided, thereby enabling a suitable operation on the operation surface 870B (that is, an operation surface 870B configured to be relatively large), and at the same time, the player can feel the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 provided with the operation surface 870B. You can experience it favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pressing operation device 1260 of the present embodiment, the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side of the hand) is placed on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. By mounting the device, the operation feeling of the movement of the pressing operation device 1260 (movement of the operation surface 870B) can be experienced by the movement of the hand accompanying the movement of the operation surface 870B.

Therefore, for example, in the pressing operation device 1260 of the present embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the number of times the unit game is held for the special symbol, as in the pressing operation device 1260 described in the sixth embodiment. In a configuration that changes according to the situation (more specifically, the number increases as the number of holdings increases), the player places the hand placed on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. You can feel the increase or decrease in the number of holdings by moving.

Further, in the configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1260 of the embodiment changes according to the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held (more specifically, the height increases as the number of times of holding increases). A neutral position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is set with respect to a predetermined number of holdings (for example, zero) smaller than the maximum number of holdings (for example, 8 times). It is also possible to sensibly grasp whether the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol is more or less than the predetermined number of holdings by moving the hand placed on the operation surface 870B. It is possible.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment is devised so as to improve the attention of the player even in the non-gaming state in which the fluctuation display is not performed.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to seventh embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the seventh embodiments.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-game state (standby) in which the player is waiting for the execution of the game and the variation display is not performed. The so-called "customer waiting effect" is composed of moving images or images obtained by diverting moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during variable display. The moving image data for the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each effect pattern.

Specifically, for example, for a part or all of a plurality of types of effects prepared in advance, a partial series of moving images in the effect from each video data corresponding to each target effect ( A continuous frame image) is cut out, or if there are multiple target effects, each of the cut out videos is connected in a predetermined order for each target effect to form a customer waiting effect. To do.

For example, when a plurality of types of suggestion effects, which are one of the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, are prepared during the variable display, some or all (that is, at least one) of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are prepared. For the suggestion effect, a partial series of moving images (continuous frame images) in the suggestion effect are cut out from each video data corresponding to each target suggestion effect, and the cut out video or the target When there are a plurality of suggestion effects, each of the cut out moving images is connected to each of the target suggestion effects in a predetermined order, and a moving image is configured as a customer waiting effect.

The "partial series of moving images" cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display may be any range of moving images in the effect. For example, it may be configured to cut out a part of a partial moving image (continuous frame image) including at least a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the target effect.

As the "range in which a characteristic display is performed in the production", for example, when the target production is a suggestion production, a predetermined moving image capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the suggestion production. A part (a moving image in a predetermined range), more specifically, for example, a moving image part in which a character suggesting the degree of expectation for a transition to a special gaming state appears, or a moving part in which the background color is a color suggesting the degree of expectation. And so on. For example, in the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment described above, a moving image portion in which a predetermined character such as characters CA1 to CA3 (see FIG. 19) appears is cut out as a "range in which a characteristic display is performed in the effect". The configuration may be the target of.

Alternatively, for example, when the target effect is an effect that prompts an operation on the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the variable display, the effect of prompting the operation is characteristic. The moving image portion showing the specific content may be defined as "the range in which the characteristic display is performed in the production". For example, the moving image portion corresponding to the "effect of injecting air into a balloon with a manual air pump" and the "effect of a character trying to open a tightly closed door" illustrated in the sixth embodiment described above is described as " It may be configured to be cut out as "a range in which a characteristic display is performed in the production".

In addition, the "range in which a characteristic production is performed in the production" is a characteristic video part (for example, a suggestive production) that cannot be seen in other productions (suggestion production, etc.) regardless of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state. , A moving image part in which a character that cannot be seen in other productions appears).

It should be noted that the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be a partial moving image cut out from the target effect or a moving image obtained by connecting the cut out moving images in a predetermined order. For example, the entire range of moving images in the target production, or the moving images in which the entire range of moving images are connected in a predetermined order may be used as the customer waiting production, and a part of the target production may be cut out. A moving image in which the moving image and the moving image of the entire range in the target effect are mixed may be configured as a customer waiting effect.

The customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be composed of a partial moving image cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display or a full range of moving images in the effect as described above. For example, from one or more frame images among the frame images constituting the respective moving image data corresponding to each target effect, targeting a part or all of the plurality of types of effects prepared in advance. An image of one or a plurality of areas may be cut out, and an image or a moving image including each of the one or a plurality of images cut out from each effect may be configured as a customer waiting effect.

Specifically, for example, as the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display, a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state similar to the first suggestion effect in the fifth embodiment described above. When multiple types of suggestion effects appearing in are prepared, some or all (that is, at least one) suggestion effects of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are targeted, and each target suggestion effect is supported. Of the frame images constituting each moving image data, an image of one or a plurality of areas is cut out from one or a plurality of frame images, and an image or a moving image including each of the one or a plurality of images cut out from each production is waited for by the customer. It may be configured as a production.

In this case, for example, an image or a moving image in which all the images (cutout images) appear at once on a predetermined background image, or all the cutout images are displayed a plurality of times. Images or videos that are divided and appear in sequence are configured as a customer waiting effect.

The frame image from which the image is cut out may be any of the frame images constituting the target effect. For example, when the target effect is the same suggestion effect as the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment described above, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state among the frame images constituting the suggestion effect is set. An image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image including a suggestion character.

Alternatively, if the target effect is an effect that prompts an operation on the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the variable display, among the frame images constituting the effect. , A configuration in which an image of a predetermined area is cut out from a frame image corresponding to an image including characteristic contents in the effect (for example, a predetermined image including a manual air pump in an effect of injecting air into a balloon with a manual air pump). It may be.

Alternatively, in the target production (suggestion production, etc.), an image containing characteristic contents that cannot be seen in other productions regardless of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (for example, viewing in other productions). An image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image corresponding to (such as an image in which a character that cannot be used) appears.

Further, the cropped area of the image in the frame image may be any area in the target frame image. For example, when the target frame image is a frame image including a character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, the configuration may be such that a region including a part of the character is cut out.

In addition, the customer waiting effect includes an image or a moving image including one or a plurality of images cut out from each effect, a moving image of the entire range in the target effect as described above, or a partial moving image cut out from the effect. It may be a combination of.

When it is determined that the time when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the sub-control board 940 is in a state of waiting for the player to execute the game, and the variation display is not performed. Assuming that the player is in the gaming state (waiting), the display of the customer waiting effect of the above-described embodiment is started.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 is determined that the firing handle 252 is not operated based on the command received from the main control board 920, and the decorative symbol display device 479 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner or produces a jackpot effect. The period during which the non-execution state continues is timed by a timer or counter provided in the sub-control board 940, and when the period exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. It is determined that the predetermined time has passed.

It should be noted that the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be one type, and the combination of the effects to appear in the customer waiting effect (the effect used for cutting out a moving image or an image) can be changed, or the same effect can be displayed in the customer waiting effect. A plurality of customer waiting effects may be prepared by changing the position of the cut-out moving image or image to be output, changing the appearance order of the cut-out moving image or image, or the like.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a predetermined pushing operation with respect to a pressing operation device such as a pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or a pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a non-gaming state (standby). The mode selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs during the game (that is, the period during which the game is not in the non-gaming state). The variation display (variation effect) by (contents of variation display, variation pattern) is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Specifically, in the non-gaming state, predetermined information (for example, "when viewing a sample of the variable display" is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, which prompts the player to start the variable display for demonstration. , Press the button! ”) Is displayed, and in this situation, the variable display starts when the push operation is executed.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having such a configuration includes a demo pseudo-winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demo pseudo variation type counter to the first. The sub-control board 940 is provided with the pseudo-variation type counter for demonstration of No. 4.

These counters included in the sub-control board 940 (pseudo winning random number counter for demo, pseudo jackpot symbol random counter for demo, pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demo, and pseudo variable type counter for first demo to pseudo for fourth demo). The variable type counter) functions in the same manner as the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variable type counter to the fourth variable type counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920, respectively. It is a counter to do.

The counter included in the sub-control board 940 will be specifically described. While the winning random number counter for the special symbol provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for performing the special symbol lottery, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter (a part of the area of RAM in the sub control board 940) is used. , It functions as a counter for performing a winning / failing lottery for a pseudo demonstration corresponding to the special symbol lottery. The demo pseudo-winning random number counter generates a demo pseudo-winning random number (hereinafter, also referred to as “demo pseudo-winning random number”) corresponding to the winning random number related to the special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter has the same winning probability as the jackpot winning probability by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, and is a pseudo jackpot for demonstration (hereinafter, "pseudo jackpot for demonstration"). (Also called) can be selected (lottery possible). Therefore, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter is configured to be the same as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol included in the main control board 920, for example.

While the jackpot symbol random number counter provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting the jackpot symbol, the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM in the sub control board 940) is concerned. It functions as a counter for selecting a pseudo jackpot symbol for demonstration (hereinafter, also referred to as "pseudo jackpot symbol for demo") corresponding to the jackpot symbol. The demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter generates a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as “demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number”) corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number.

The demo pseudo jackpot symbols are prepared for each type of jackpot symbol, and the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is configured so that any type of demo pseudo jackpot symbol can be selected. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is a type corresponding to each type of the demo pseudo jackpot symbol and can be selected by the jackpot symbol random number counter. It is configured so that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is configured to be the same as the jackpot symbol random number counter included in the main control board 920, for example.

While the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting a stop pattern, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter (a part of the area of the RAM in the sub control board 940) is concerned. It functions as a counter for selecting (selecting) a pseudo stop pattern for demonstration (hereinafter, also referred to as "pseudo stop pattern for demonstration") corresponding to the stop pattern. The demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter generates a demo pseudo stop pattern random number (hereinafter, also referred to as “demo pseudo stop pattern random number”) corresponding to the stop pattern random number.

The demo pseudo stop pattern is prepared for each type of stop pattern, and the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured so that any type of demo pseudo stop pattern can be selected. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is a type corresponding to each type of the demo pseudo stop pattern and can be selected by the stop pattern selection counter. It is configured so that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured to be the same as the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920, for example.

The first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter included in the main control board 920 select the variation time, variation pattern, etc. of the variation display of the decorative symbol performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 when the special symbol starts and wins. While the counter functions as a counter for determining), the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter (both are a part of the area of the RAM in the sub-control board 940) are used. A counter for selecting the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern of the pseudo decorative symbol variation display performed for demonstration by the decorative symbol display device 479 when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state. Functions as. Each of the various demo pseudo-variation type counters generates pseudo-variation pattern random numbers for various demos corresponding to the various variation pattern random numbers.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various types of pseudo-variation type counters for demonstrations are used to set each type of the variation display of the pseudo-decorative pattern performed for demonstration, such as the variation time and the variation pattern, to the respective types. It is configured so that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type such as fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern that can be selected by various fluctuation type counters. Therefore, the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter are configured to be the same as, for example, the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter included in the main control board 920, respectively. Will be done.

The demo pseudo-winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter are all , Each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters (that is, a winning random number counter related to a special symbol, a jackpot symbol random number counter, a stop pattern selection counter, and a first variation type counter to a fourth variation type counter. It suffices to be configured to be the same as various winning probabilities or selection probabilities in the counters), and does not necessarily have to be the same as each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters.

The demo pseudo-winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter provided in the sub-control board 940. Is updated in the same manner as the update of the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920, respectively. To.

That is, the sub-control board 940 has a demo pseudo-winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, and a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the main control board 920 has a special symbol in timer interrupt processing (main control interrupt processing). The process of updating the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, and the stop pattern selection counter according to the above (that is, the random number update process S1203 (see FIG. 12)) is updated at the same interval as the execution interval.

Further, the sub-control board 940 uses the first demo pseudo-variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter, and the main control board 920 performs the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter in the main processing. (That is, the change counter update process S1022 (see FIG. 11) is executed at the same interval as the interval for executing the process (that is, the change counter update process S1022 (see FIG. 11)), and the main control board 920 performs the first change in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process). The type counter to the fourth variation type counter are updated at intervals similar to the interval at which the process of updating (that is, the variation counter update process S1205 (see FIG. 12)) is executed.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 has each of these counters (that is, a demo pseudo-winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demo pseudo variation. If the value of each counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576") of each counter at each update timing of the type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-variation type counter, the current value is used. Change to a value larger by "1". On the other hand, when the value of each counter is the specified maximum value of each counter, the value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”) of each counter.

The above-mentioned pseudo-winning random number counter for demo, pseudo-big hit symbol random counter for demo, pseudo-stop pattern selection counter for demo, and various pseudo-variation type counters for demo (first pseudo-variation type counter to fourth demo). The demo pseudo-variation type counter) does not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter may have another configuration.

For example, in the above configuration, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demo pseudo variation type counters are updated from a certain initial value. However, the initial value (circular initial value) may be set each time by using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as necessary. May be.

Specifically, for example, the sub-control board 940 includes two types of random number initial value counters that function in the same manner as the winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol included in the main control board 920. Then, using each of these random number initial value counters, the setting of the circular initial value of the demo pseudo-winning random number counter and the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is set, and the winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol are set. The configuration may be performed in the same manner as in the case of setting the circulation initial value of the winning random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number counter related to the special symbol.

When the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the non-gaming state, the sub control board 940 has a winning random number, a jackpot symbol random number, related to the special symbol when the main control board 920 starts and wins a special symbol. And the pseudo-winning random number for demo, the pseudo-big hit symbol random number for demo, and the pseudo-big hit symbol random number for demo from the pseudo-winning random number counter for demo, the pseudo-big hit symbol random number counter for demo, and the pseudo-stop pattern selection counter for demo, as in the case of acquiring the stop pattern random number. And the pseudo stop pattern random number for demonstration is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940.

Based on the acquired pseudo-winning random numbers for demonstration, the sub-control board 940 performs a lottery (pseudo-win / fail lottery) in the same manner as when the main control board 920 performs a special symbol lottery to perform a pseudo-win / fail determination.

When the demo pseudo jackpot is won in the pseudo win / loss lottery, the sub control board 940 is based on the acquired demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number, and the main control board 920 is based on the jackpot symbol random number. Similar to the case of determining the type, the type of the pseudo stop symbol for the demo (pseudo jackpot symbol for the demo) corresponding to the winning of the pseudo jackpot for the demo is determined. The types of pseudo jackpot symbols for demonstration in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment correspond to the types of jackpot symbols determined based on the jackpot symbol random numbers.

On the other hand, when the sub-control board 940 does not win the demo pseudo jackpot in the pseudo win / loss lottery, the sub control board 940 has a pseudo stop symbol for demonstration (for demo) different from the pseudo jackpot symbol for demo. Pseudo-missing symbol) is set as the stop symbol.

After the pseudo winning / failing lottery, the sub-control board 940 is performed for demonstration based on the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery, the value of the pseudo-stop pattern random number for demonstration, and the value of various pseudo-variation type counters for demonstration. The variation time of the pseudo-decorative symbol variation display is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the variation display is selected.

The sub-control board 940 is configured to randomly determine the virtual number of holds and the virtual game state corresponding to the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol, and the lottery result and demo of the pseudo winning / fail lottery. Pseudo-stop pattern Pseudo-decorative pattern performed for demonstration using the value of random numbers and the values of various pseudo-variation type counters for demonstration, as well as the determined virtual hold count and virtual game state. The variation time of the variation display of the above and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the variation display may be determined.

The sub-control board 940 determines the variation time of the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbol performed for demonstration and the variation pattern of the decoration symbol in the variation display, and then decorates the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbol. It starts in the symbol display device 479. As a result, the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting effect to the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After the sub-control board 940 starts the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbol for demonstration, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the variation display at the variation time determined for the variation display. Continue according to the determined variation pattern. The sub-control board 940 confirms and displays the symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the pseudo jackpot symbol random number for demonstration as the variation time determined for the variation display elapses.

When the determined variation pattern is a specific reach display (for example, super reach) by a decorative symbol, the sub-control board 940 selects an effect pattern for suggestion effect. As a result, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the suggestive effect of the selected effect pattern is displayed after the reach display.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is the same as various counters used for determining the content of the variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the start winning of the special symbol. It is equipped with a pseudo demo counter (pseudo winning random number counter for demo, pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demo, pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demo, and various pseudo variable type counters for demo). When a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pushed in during the game state, the same selection conditions (that is, each) as when the special symbol is started and won are used by using these pseudo demo counters. The variation pattern and the effect pattern in the suggestion effect are selected based on the same winning probability or selection probability by the counters and the same method of acquiring random numbers from each counter).

As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player pushes the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, which is the same as the case where the start prize of the special symbol is generated. The variation display (variation effect) according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and the variation display can be visually recognized.

When the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting effect to the variable display due to a predetermined pressing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the variable display is displayed. If neither the pressing operation device nor the firing handle 252 is operated even after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the above, the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 is switched to the customer waiting effect.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-gaming state is used for various effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display. It is composed of a moving image or an image obtained by diverting the moving image data prepared in advance.

As a result, in the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-gaming state, the moving image or image included in the customer waiting effect is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display. The content of the effect portion corresponding to the moving image or the image can be recognized or guessed by the player who visually recognizes the customer waiting effect. For example, the player can be made to recognize the content of the production portion corresponding to the video based on the video cut out from the production, and the production corresponding to the video is based on the image cut out from the frame image constituting the production. The content of the part can be guessed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

Further, since the video data prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display is diverted for the customer waiting effect, the video data dedicated for the customer waiting effect is used. It is not necessary to prepare the data, and the amount of memory can be suppressed accordingly. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare dedicated video data for the customer waiting production, the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, when dedicated video data is prepared for the customer waiting effect, it may be necessary to lower the resolution of the customer waiting effect due to the limitation of the storage capacity of the storage unit, but the effect displayed during the variable display. Since it is configured to divert the moving image data for the purpose, it is possible to display the customer waiting effect with the same high resolution as the effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, first 2 The variation display (variation effect) according to the mode selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, so that it appears based on the start prize of the special symbol. In the non-gaming state, the variable display to be displayed can be made to appear with the same appearance probability at the time of the start winning.

As a result, the player can determine what kind of fluctuation display appears at what frequency (probability) in the actual game (that is, during the game) during the non-game state, and the special game state. You can experience the contents of the variable display according to the high degree of expectation for the transition to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the playability brought about by the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, which can improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

It should be noted that, in the period from when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-gaming state until the variation display (variation effect) ends, after the sub-control board 940 receives a start prize of a special symbol. It may be configured to stop (do not execute) a part of the functions executed during the period when the variation display based on the start winning prize ends.

For example, when the pressing operation device is operated during the non-gaming state, the sub-control board 940 has a function of being executed during the period after the start winning of the special symbol is generated and the variation display based on the starting winning is finished. Of these, at least among the variable display of the decorative symbol, the definite display of the stop symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol) by the decorative symbol, and the operation of the predetermined electric accessory that operates during the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. It may be configured to stop the function of 1, and thereby, at least a part of the effects may be non-executed.

Further, when an input operation is enabled for the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1 or 23) during the variable display, and a button effect is executed in which the effect accompanying the execution of the variable display changes depending on the presence or absence of the input operation. In addition, the button effect associated with the input operation may be non-executed. For example, when a display prompting an input operation such as "press a button" is displayed during the variable display, by disabling the input operation to the input operation device 260, the start of the special symbol is started after the winning prize is generated. It may be configured to stop a part of the functions executed during the period when the variable display based on the winning is finished.

When the final display of the stop symbol by the decorative symbol is stopped (that is, the final display of the stop symbol is not executed), the sub-control board 940 is a substitute for the jackpot symbol suggesting that a jackpot has occurred. Decorate the display (for example, a character string such as "Atari?" Or "Lucky" that can recall the occurrence of a big hit, or a pattern or image (for example, a character in a guts pose) that can recall the occurrence of a jackpot). It may be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 479, and a display instead of the lost symbol suggesting that the loss has occurred (for example, a character string such as "sorry" that can recall the occurrence of the loss, or the occurrence of the loss is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display a display using a reminiscent pattern or image (for example, a drooping character).

In this way, by non-execution of some of the effects, the period from the pressing operation device being performed during the non-game state to the end of the variation display, and the start of the special symbol after the start prize is generated. There is a difference in appearance from the period in which the variable display based on the winning is finished in that some of the functions executed in the latter period are not executed in the former period. As a result, the variation display (variation effect) displayed when the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the non-game state is displayed based on the start winning of the special symbol. Unlike this, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize that the variable display is a pseudo variable display in which a special gaming state is unlikely to occur after the end of the variable display.

That is, when the player operates the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like, for example, changes the display (variation) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the operation. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible after the pseudo fluctuation display, such as a special gaming state occurring after the fluctuation display. As a result, the player or the clerk of the game hall operates the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, so that the recognition after the fluctuation display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is erroneous, and thereby it should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable to the player or the clerk of the game hall, such as expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state.

Further, as a variable display (variable effect) that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, a pushing operation device (for example, pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23)) is used during a predetermined operable period. )) In a configuration provided with a variation display (hereinafter, the variation display is also referred to as "variation display configured to enable operation input") in which a predetermined suggestive effect can be displayed by performing a push operation for ()). When the variation display (variation display configured to enable operation input) is displayed in the non-gaming state by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261, it is controlled by the sub-control board 940 during the operable period in the variation display. , Automatically (ie, without the player's operation) as if the pressing operation device 1261 was pushed by the player (ie, to have the same variation display appearance as when the pushing operation was performed). It may be configured to be used.

Specifically, when the variation display configured to enable operation input is displayed in the non-gaming state (standby), the motor 863 by the sub-control board 940 during the operable period in the variation display (see FIG. 20). The operating mechanism 860 is operated by the control of the above, whereby the pressing operation device 1261 automatically moves from the neutral position to the downward direction (operating direction) of the pressing operation device 1261, and then moves downward. It may be configured to move upward and return to the neutral position. As a result, when a variation display configured to enable operation input by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the non-gaming state is displayed, the player operates the pressing operation device during the operable period in the variation display. Such a situation can be simulated without the player actually operating the push-in operation device.

In such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to automatically move the pressing operation device 1261 up and down and then display a predetermined suggestion effect that can be displayed by the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261. As a result, when the variable display configured so that the operation can be input by the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the non-gaming state is displayed, the player operates the pushing operation device during the operable period in the variable display. Then, you can experience what kind of suggestive effect will appear in a simulated manner without actually operating the push-in operation device.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable display configured to allow operation input is provided as a variable display that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol start winning is generated, the player is in a non-gaming state. Since the variable display (variable display configured to enable operation input) can be simulated, the variable display enables a predetermined suggestion effect to appear with the participation of the player such as the operation of the push-in operation device. Since it is possible to increase the player's interest in the playability that is brought about, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the predetermined suggestion effect that can be displayed by the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is executed based on the pushing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 only when the start winning of the special symbol actually occurs. Can be done. For this reason, it is possible to add the playability in which the suggestion effect appears in response to the pushing operation that cannot be obtained in the simulated experience to the actual game executed based on the launch of the game ball, and the non-game state. It is possible to urge the player who visually recognizes the variable display inside to start the game.

In addition, when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device during the display of the variation display based on the pushing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 in the non-gaming state, the sub The control board 940 may be configured to terminate the non-gaming state. In such a case, the sub-control board 940 displays the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 after the end of the non-gaming state, for example, the contents displayed before the non-game state starts (for example, the final display by the decorative symbol 1621). ) Is displayed again.

Since the variation display displayed during the non-game state also ends when the non-game state ends, the player displays the variation display displayed by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-game state. Can be easily terminated by pushing the pressing operation device during the fluctuation display.

As a result, for example, the player operates the pressing operation device when he / she sees a part of the variation display that he / she wants to see while displaying the variation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state. By doing so, the variable display being displayed can be forcibly terminated, so that it is possible to start the game as soon as possible without having to wait until the display of the part that is not necessary for itself is completed.

<9th embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25. The pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment described above, and more specifically, the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during the non-gaming state (standby). This is the same as when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started and won during a game when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23). An example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the non-gaming state is shown in the configuration in which the variable display according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the following description, the same configurations as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to eighth embodiments described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the ninth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first to eighth embodiments described above, or from the first embodiment described above. It may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the eighth embodiments.

FIG. 25A is a screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when the start prize of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs. 25 (B) shows a screen in a variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state. It is a screen transition diagram which shows an example of transition.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A), when a start prize of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, it corresponds to the right of the unit game related to the special symbol generated based on the start prize. The hold display 1622 indicating the hold of the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the start of the unit game related to the special symbol based on the start prize (that is, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start prize). Will be done. As shown in FIG. 25A, for example, the hold display 1622 is stopped and displayed on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479, specifically, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start prize of the special symbol. It is displayed on the lower side of the decorative pattern 1621. The display control of the hold display 1622 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, between the time when the starting condition is satisfied and the start of the variable display (unit game), after the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed. It has a function of suggesting the degree of possibility (expectation) of transition to the special gaming state to the player, and as an example of the function, a case where the hold display 1622 is used will be described as an example.

The hold display 1622 indicates the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for the shape according to the shape. For example, when the shape of the hold display 1622 is a star shape as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display (A). It indicates that the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the start winning prize) is a predetermined value (for example, about 70%) set for the star shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hold display 1622 having different shapes are prepared so as to be displayable, and the expectation degree (expectation degree for transition to the special gaming state) that differs depending on the shape difference of the hold display 1622 is set. It is configured as shown.

For example, when the hold display 1622 has a star shape, it shows the highest expectation (for example, about 70%) among all the shapes of the hold display 1622 that can be displayed, and when the hold display 1622 has a regular triangle shape. Shows a lower expectation (for example, approximately 50%) than when the hold display 1622 is star-shaped, and when the hold display 1622 is inverted triangular, it is higher than when the hold display 1622 is regular triangle. When the hold display 1622 shows a low degree of expectation (for example, about 30%) and the hold display 1622 has a circular shape (round shape), the degree of expectation is lower than when the hold display 1622 has an inverted triangular shape (for example, about 10%). It may be configured to indicate. The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state by the hold display 1622 does not necessarily have to be made by the shape of the hold display 1622, and instead of the shape of the hold display 1622 or in addition to the shape of the hold display 1622. , The configuration may use elements other than the shape such as the color of the hold display 1622 and the display mode (for example, blinking) of the hold display 1622.

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each shape of the hold display 1622 is a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, 1st special symbol lottery) performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the hold display. Based on the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table referenced when not winning in the special symbol lottery. It is determined.

It should be noted that the configuration may include a hold display 1622 having a shape indicating the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, and a hold display 1622 having a shape not showing the degree of expectation (irrelevant to the degree of expectation). In such a case, the sub-control board 940 selects whether or not to suggest the expected degree by the hold display 1622 by a predetermined lottery, and if it is selected not to suggest the expected degree, the expected degree is selected. When it is selected to display the hold display 1622 of a shape that is not shown (for example, a star shape or a regular triangle shape) and suggest the degree of expectation, a shape according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (for example, a shape according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state). For example, it may be configured to display the hold display 1622 (circular shape).

Further, as a type of the hold display 1622, it may have a function of changing the shape from the hold display 1622 having a shape with a low expectation to the hold display having a shape with a high expectation.

In FIG. 25 (A), when the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol is zero, the start prize of the special symbol is generated, and thereby, the hold display 1622 of 1 is displayed based on the occurrence of the start prize. The case where it was done is illustrated. The hold display 1622 is displayed one by one for each right of the unit game related to the special symbol.

If a new start prize for a special symbol is generated when the number of hold of the unit game related to the special symbol is 1 or more, the shape of the hold display 1622 corresponding to the new start prize is set to the expected degree. The shape may be displayed according to the shape. For example, the shape of the hold display 1622 corresponding to the new start prize is temporarily displayed (for example, a predetermined period such as 30 seconds, or then a start prize of a special symbol is generated. It may be configured to be displayed in a shape according to the degree of expectation during the period until the game is played, the period until one right of the unit game related to the pending special symbol is exhausted, and the like).

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the start prize of the special symbol is started, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the hold display 1622 corresponding to the start prize disappears and becomes invisible, and the decorative symbol 1621 becomes invisible. The variable display is started. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the suggestion display 1623 has a predetermined probability (for example, 30% or 60) in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 (variable display of the special symbol). It may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 with a probability smaller than 100 such as% or 100%).

Similar to the hold display 1622, the suggestion display 1623 functions as a display indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state) after the end of the unit game related to the special symbol. That is, the suggestion display 1623 functions as a display suggesting the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 being executed. The display control of the suggestion display 1623 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 25 (A), the suggestion display 1623 is configured in a balloon shape including a comment such as "super heat!". The suggestion display 1623 of the balloon shape is expected to transition to the special gaming state after the variable display during execution (reliability) depending on the content of the comment in the balloon (for example, "super heat!" Or "chance!"). ) Is shown. For example, when the content of the comment included in the balloon constituting the suggestion display 1623 is "super heat!" As shown in FIG. 25 (A), the expectation degree of transition to the special gaming state after the variable display during execution is It indicates that it is a predetermined value (for example, about 80%) set for the content of the comment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion displays 1623 having different comment contents are prepared so as to be displayable, and the expected degree (expectation for transition to the special gaming state) differs depending on the difference in the comment contents in the suggestion display 1623. Degree). The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the difference in the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623.

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623 is a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the suggestion display. , 2nd special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when not winning in the special symbol lottery. Determined by.

The high degree of expectation (the magnitude of the degree of expectation) for transitioning to the special gaming state indicated by the suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the suggestion display 1623. The hold display 1622 (that is, the hold display 1622 based on the start prize of the same special symbol as the suggestion display 1623) may be the same as or different from the high degree of expectation for transitioning to the special gaming state. Good.

If the magnitude of the expectation (expectation to transition to the special gaming state) indicated by the suggestion display 1623 is different from the high expectation indicated by the hold display 1622 corresponding to the suggestion display 1623, the former The value may be larger than the latter, or the former may be smaller than the latter.

The suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 (during the variable display of the special symbol) does not necessarily have to have a balloon shape as shown in FIG. 25 (A). , A character or the like showing the degree of expectation of transitioning to a different special gaming state depending on the type, a combination of the character and the balloon described above, or the like, or a display by a still image. It may be a moving image in which the movement of the character and the characters of the balloon are gradually displayed.

When a reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621, a predetermined probability (for example, 100 such as 30% or 60%) is obtained after the display of the reach display, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment described above. With a smaller probability or 100%), a suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears is executed. The display control of the suggestion effect is executed by the sub-control board 940. The suggestive effect in which the predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific reach display such as so-called super reach, or may be displayed before the reach display. Often, it may be displayed after the start winning prize and before the unit game is started.

As for the suggestion effect after the reach display, a plurality of types of effect patterns are prepared according to the degree of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state, as in the case of the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each effect pattern is the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery, 2nd special) performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display. It is determined by the winning probability in the symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to when the special symbol lottery is won, and the selection probability in the selection table referred to when the special symbol lottery is not won.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each effect pattern in the suggestion effect after the reach display is configured to be different according to the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for the effect pattern. Examples of the pattern include a plurality of types of characters having different types of characters, clothes, belongings, movements, and the like.

For example, when a character CA11 holding a sword in his right hand appears in the suggestion effect after the reach display, the expectation level for transitioning to the special gaming state after that is a predetermined value set for the character CA11 (for example). , Approximately 90%). The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state based on the type of the character appearing in the suggestion effect.

When the suggestion effect is executed after the reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621, it corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display after the end of the suggestion effect. The final display of the decorative symbol 1621 to be displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed based on the start prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display is a big hit, the decorative symbol 1621 is set to "777" as shown in FIG. 25 (A). Confirmed display.

When a special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) starts winning a prize during the game, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to the variation pattern selected based on the values of various variation type counters is displayed. The fluctuation display time (variation time) corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is displayed from the beginning to the end (confirmed display). That is, when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game, the period (time) from the start to the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponds to the variation pattern of the variation display (that is, the selected variation pattern). It is said to be the fluctuation time.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state (standby), the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment is performed. Similar to the above, the variation display selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a pseudo variation display for demonstration.

It should be noted that the selection condition of the variation display when the pressing operation for the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the non-game state, and the selection condition of the variation display when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game. Does not necessarily have to be the same or substantially the same, and the selection condition of the variable display differs depending on whether the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state or when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game. It may have a different configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-game state, the variation pattern selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs during the game. In the variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to, the period (time) from the start (first) to the end (the final confirmation display which is the last of the variable display) is the variable display. The period (time) is shorter than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of (that is, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, after the hold display 1622 is displayed, a pseudo variable display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 is displayed. In the period from the start of the variation display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display, the variation display is displayed in the variation display based on the start prize of the special symbol (that is, the start of the special symbol). Pseudo variable display for demonstration by displaying at a higher speed (that is, increasing the playback speed of the video) compared to the period from the start of the variable display based on the prize to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display). The time from the start to the end in is shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display.

In addition, the time from the start of the variation display based on the pressing operation to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, the pseudo variation display for demonstration) to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display is set as the special symbol. As a specific example in which the variable display based on the start winning prize is set to a shorter time than the corresponding period, for example, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the variable display based on the pressing operation (that is, , Pseudo variable display for demonstration) The content displayed during the period from the start of the suggestion effect after the reach display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display is displayed from the start of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol to the reach display. The configuration may be such that the display is performed at a higher speed than the variable display during the period until the suggestion effect appears (that is, the playback speed of the moving image is increased as compared with the case where the start prize of the special symbol occurs).

Alternatively, for example, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, among the variation displays based on the pressing operation, a suggestion effect after the reach display is performed from the start of the variation display. The display of the content to be displayed before the appearance may be omitted (that is, the suggestion effect after the reach display is displayed after the start of the variation display) may be used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the case of displaying the suggestion effect after the reach display in the pseudo variation display for demonstration (that is, the variation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state). In addition, two or more suggestion effects (that is, variable displays based on the starting prizes) in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state differs depending on the display contents, the variable displays that are separately executed by the two starting prizes. Two or more suggestive effects) that can be displayed by are simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The control of the display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, when a plurality of types of characters having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state are prepared as characters that can appear during the suggestion effect, at least some of the characters of the plurality of types are each. Two or more suggestive effects that appear are configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at the same time.

Specifically, for example, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the suggestion after the reach display in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern. When four types of characters CA11 to CA14 having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state are prepared as characters that can appear in the production, these four types of characters are shown in FIG. 25 (B). Suggestion effects including CA11 to CA14 are displayed in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in which the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 is divided into substantially four in the vertical and horizontal directions.

As a result, the two or more suggestion effects in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state differs depending on the type of the appearing character constitutes the variable display like the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. The image (frame image) to be displayed is displayed in each display area 479D to 479G at the same time in a size reduced to a smaller size than the case where the image to be displayed (frame image) is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned four types of characters are not necessarily the suggestion effects (suggestion effects after reach) that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and have different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state. It is not necessary that there are four types corresponding to, and there may be three or less types, or five or more types.

In addition, the number of suggestion effects (suggestion effects after reach) that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and have different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state is reached in the decorative symbol display device 479. If the number of display areas divided to display each of the subsequent suggestion effects is larger than the number of display areas (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25 (B)), the division of the suggestive effects that can appear is the division. As many as possible to be displayed in the displayed display area may be selected and displayed.

Further, the number of display areas divided in order to display each suggestion effect after reach in the decorative symbol display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, but may be three or less, or five or more. You may. Further, the number of display areas divided in order to display each suggestion effect after reach in the decorative symbol display device 479 is present according to the selected variation pattern (that is, in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern). It may be a variable configuration (depending on the number of suggested effects after reach that can be produced).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, FIG. 25 (B) shows before the start of the pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration. As shown, the hold display 1622 is displayed as a pseudo hold display corresponding to the pseudo variation display. More specifically, the hold display 1622, which is at least a part of the hold display 1622 having a plurality of shapes different depending on the high degree of expectation (magnitude of the degree of expectation) for the transition to the special gaming state, and has two or more shapes. (Two or more types of hold display 1622) are configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at the same time. The control of the display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, four types of shapes (for example, star shape, regular triangle shape, inverted triangle shape, and circular shape) are prepared as the shape of the hold display 1622 according to the high degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state. If so, as shown in FIG. 25B, each of these four types of hold display 1622 divides the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 before the start of the pseudo variable display for demonstration. It is displayed simultaneously in the areas 479D to 479G.

As a result, the display images including the two or more types of hold display 1622 having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state according to the shape are displayed in the variable manner as in the variable display based on the start prize of another symbol. The image (frame image) constituting the above is displayed in each display area 479D to 479G at the same time in a size reduced to a smaller size than the case where the image (frame image) constituting the above is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479.

The number of hold displays 1622 having different shapes is the number of display areas divided for displaying the hold displays 1622 of each shape in the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25 (B)). ), As many as the number of hold displays 1622 having different shapes that can be displayed in the divided display area may be selected and displayed.

Further, the number of display areas to be divided in order to display the hold display 1622 having a different shape in the decorative symbol display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, but may be three or less, or five or more. You may. Further, the number of display areas divided to display the hold display 1622 having a different shape in the decorative symbol display device 479 and the number of display areas divided to display each character that can appear in the suggestion effect are determined. It does not necessarily have to be the same, and the former number and the latter number may have different configurations.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), a variation display (demo) based on the pushing operation is performed. Pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed after the end of the pseudo-variable display for demo (more specifically, the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the pseudo jackpot symbol random number for demonstration). The definite display of the decorative symbol 1621 consisting of the combination of the above) is smaller than the definite display by the decorative symbol 1621 (see FIG. 25A) displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479. Is displayed. The display control of the size of the definite display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

Further, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), in addition to the pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621, the non-gaming state is in progress. A display 1624 containing information reminiscent of is displayed. The display control of the display 1624 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The player who visually recognizes the display 1624 can confirm the display by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the content of the display 1624 (that is, information reminiscent of being in a non-gaming state). , It can be recognized that it is not a confirmation display displayed after the end of the fluctuation display based on the start prize of the special symbol, but a pseudo confirmation display for demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 25 (B), the display 1624 is configured to include the character string "demo" as information reminiscent of being in a non-gaming state, but is in a non-gaming state. As long as it is a character string that can be recalled, it may be a character string different from "during demonstration". Further, the information included in the display 1624 that can be recalled to be in a non-gaming state does not necessarily have to be a character string such as "demo" described above, and it is possible to recall that the information is in a non-gaming state. It may be a simple pattern or a pattern (for example, a pattern such as a cross mark).

In addition, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, after the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation is completed, the pseudo variation display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 is completed. Instead of the definite display, a pseudo definite display for demonstration by the alternative display 1625, which does not include the decorative symbol 1621 as shown in FIG. 25 (B), may be performed. The display control of the alternative display 1625 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The alternative display 1625 is configured to include a display that substitutes for the jackpot symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred, and a display that substitutes for the lost symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred.

As an alternative display 1625 that substitutes for the jackpot symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred, for example, a character string such as "Atari?" Or "lucky" that can recall the occurrence of a jackpot, or the occurrence of a jackpot can be recalled. Examples include a pattern or an image (for example, a character in a guts pose as shown in FIG. 25 (B)).

On the other hand, as an alternative display 1625 instead of the lost pattern suggesting that the loss has occurred, for example, a character string such as "sorry" that can recall the occurrence of the loss, or a pattern or image that can recall the occurrence of the loss. (For example, a drooping character, etc.) and the like are exemplified.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by performing a pushing operation on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state can be suggested by the shape of the hold display. Since 1622 and the variation display including the suggestion effect after the reach display can be displayed as a pseudo variation display for demonstration, even if the start prize of the special symbol does not occur (the start prize of the special symbol is generated). (Even if it is not), the player can visually recognize what kind of display can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, such as the suggestion effect after reach and the hold display 1622. ..

Therefore, when it is possible to display a variable display including a display that can suggest the degree of expectation such as a suggestion effect after reach as a variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, or when a start prize of the special symbol occurs, the relevant case is concerned. In a configuration in which the degree of expectation can be suggested by the hold display 1622 for the start prize, an event that can be expected after the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state) is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability inferred from the content of the variable display, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25B, for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621. The time from the start of the pseudo-variation display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display is the time from the start of the variation display to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display in the variation display based on the start prize of the special symbol. By displaying in a shorter time than the time of, the pseudo fluctuation display for the demo can be displayed in a time shorter than the fluctuation display time (variation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. it can.

Therefore, as a selectable variation pattern, in a configuration in which a variation pattern corresponding to a variation display including a display (effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special gaming state, such as a suggestion effect after reach, is prepared. Can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state included in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern by operating the pressing operation device (pushing operation) during the non-gaming state. Display (for example, suggestion effect after reach display) can be efficiently visually recognized in a time shorter than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time for the fluctuation display including the display). ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), a pseudo variation for demonstration is performed. Before the start of the display, a hold display 1622 that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state by its shape is displayed. Therefore, the player pushes the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state to display the display image including the hold display 1622 having a predetermined shape before the start (at the start) of the pseudo variable display for demonstration. It can be visually recognized. As described above, since the pseudo variable display for the demo is configured to be shorter than the variable time of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, the special gaming state is set before the start of the pseudo variable display for the demo. By displaying a display image including a display that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to (for example, hold display 1622), the display that can suggest the degree of expectation can also be efficiently visually recognized by the player. It becomes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect after the reach display is displayed in the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state, the suggestion effect is displayed. Two or more suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state according to the display contents are simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

As a result, the player can expect the transition to the special gaming state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern (for example, super reach) by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. Two or more suggestable displays (for example, suggestive effects after reach display) can be visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference between two or more displays that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern during the non-gaming state. Therefore, during the game, it is possible to play the game while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, it is special according to the shape before the start of the pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration. Two or more types of hold displays 1622 having different expectations for the transition to the gaming state are configured to be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

As a result, the player can simultaneously visually recognize the two or more types of hold displays 1622 by pushing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. Therefore, during the non-game state, it is possible to efficiently recognize the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the pseudo variable display for demonstration, so that the special symbol can be recognized during the game. It is possible to play the game while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state according to the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the variable display based on the start winning prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, within the period from the start to the end of the variation display (pseudo variation display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, the variation). Suggests the degree of expectation for a transition to a special gaming state, such as a display image including a suggestion effect after reach or a display image including a hold display 1622, before the start (at the start) of the variable display (during display execution). The possible display is reduced to a smaller size than the case where the image (frame image) constituting the variable display is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479, such as the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. It is displayed in the same size.

As a result, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, such as the display image of the suggestion effect after reach and the display image including the hold display 1622, which is displayed based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state. The display that can suggest that the special gaming state is unlikely to occur after the display (more specifically, after the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state). The player can be preferably recognized based on the display size.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the variation display based on the pressing operation (pseudo variation display for demonstration) ends. The pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed later is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in a size smaller than the confirmed display by the decorative symbol 1621 displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol. Will be done.

Therefore, also in this respect, there is a possibility that a special gaming state may occur after the fluctuation display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (more specifically, after the display of the pseudo confirmed display for demonstration). It is possible to make the player preferably recognize that there is no such thing based on the display size of the pseudo-confirmed display for demonstration.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the First Embodiment In the first embodiment, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied to the symbol sheet 601. However, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied. May be applied to resin products. For example, a transparent resin plate, a layer containing a predetermined pattern or pattern corresponding to a decorative pattern 621 having a coating film formed or arranged on one side (back side) of the transparent resin plate, and the transparent resin. A resin product comprising a layer corresponding to a decorative portion 622, which is on the other surface side (front surface side) of the plate and has a coating film formed or arranged on the peripheral side of the predetermined pattern or the pattern, relates to the first embodiment. It may be a resin product to which the structure is applied.

In the first embodiment, the design sheet 601 has a configuration in which the decorative portion 622 does not overlap the peripheral edge of the decorative symbol 621 in the front view, but the decorative portion 622 overlaps the peripheral edge side of the decorative symbol 621 in the front view. There may be.

In the first embodiment, the design sheet 601 is configured to form the decorative portion 622 in almost all the regions except the region where the decorative symbol 621 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, but it is not always the case. It is not necessary to form the decorative portion 622 in almost all areas. For example, it may be configured to form a band-shaped decorative portion 622 along the whole or a part of the periphery of the decorative pattern 621.

In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the symbol sheet 601 has the decorative symbol 621 using the decorative portion 622 has been described, but the decoration by the decorative portion 622 is not limited to the symbol, and the characters and model names used in the model are used. It may be used for decoration for other patterns such as display, and the decorative portion 622 may be formed not only by a thin plate-shaped sheet but also by a resin part having a thickness and being moldable by a mold. Further, the decorative portion 622 is configured by using ink that can be visually recognized in the predetermined situation described in the second embodiment, and the peripheral side of the pattern reflects light in the predetermined situation. It may be configured to be easy to use.

In the first embodiment, in the symbol sheet 601, only the decorative symbol 621 (main symbol 621A, sub symbol 621B) is formed as a coating film on the back surface side of the base material 611, but not only the decorative symbol 621 but also the decorative symbol 621 is formed. A coating film may be formed on the back surface side of the base material 611 including the background portion of the decorative pattern 621.

(2) Deformation Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Second Embodiment In the above second embodiment, a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that can be visually recognized under a predetermined light such as a flash light and heating. Alternatively, a pattern (for example, a pattern 721A) that can be visually recognized under warmed conditions is provided on the design sheet 601. However, even if one of the patterns is provided on the design sheet 601. Good.

Further, in the third embodiment, either a pattern that becomes visible under a predetermined light such as a flash light or a pattern that becomes visible under a heated or heated condition is illustrated. The symbol sheet 601 may be provided with a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of being irradiated with black light. In addition, a pattern that can be visually recognized under a predetermined light such as a flash light, a pattern that can be visually recognized under a heated or heated condition, and a pattern that can be visually recognized under a black light irradiation condition can be visually recognized. The design may be provided on the design sheet 601.

In the second embodiment, the pattern becomes visible (that is, changes from an invisible mode to a visible mode) under a condition of being exposed to a predetermined light such as a flash light or under a heated or heated condition. Is provided on the design sheet 601. However, under the condition of being exposed to a predetermined light such as flash light or under the condition of being heated or heated, the design of the mode (for example, color or reflectivity) corresponding to the situation is given. May be visible. For example, in a situation where a pattern is formed using ink that changes from a first color (for example, blue) to a second color (for example, red) when heated or heated, and heated or heated. It may be configured so that the pattern of the mode (that is, the second color) corresponding to the situation can be visually recognized.

In the second embodiment, a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible under a condition in which a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied to the surface side of the base material 611, or a state in which the base material 611 is heated or heated. Although the configuration is such that the patterns (for example, the pattern 721A) that can be visually recognized below are formed, these patterns may be formed on the back surface side of the base material 611. When these patterns are formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, the pattern may be formed on the back surface side of the base material 611, and then the decorative pattern 621 may be formed on the pattern.

In the second embodiment, the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the design sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611, but the surface side of the base material 611 is decorated. The configuration according to the second embodiment may be applied to the symbol sheet 601 on which the portion 622 is formed. When the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the design sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, after the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611, the decorative portion 622 is formed. On top of this, a pattern that can be seen under a predetermined light such as flash light (for example, picture 701) or a picture that can be seen under heating or heating (for example, picture 721A, etc.) ) May be formed.

In the second embodiment, the case where a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible under a predetermined situation is applied to the symbol sheet 601 has been described, but the central structure attached to the game board 400 has been described. It may be applied to other parts such as a decorative part such as 420, or to other parts constituting the front part of the pachinko machine 100 such as at least a part of the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. It may be applied. That is, as a mode changing portion that makes the mode of the predetermined surface portion visible in different modes depending on the situation, a pattern that becomes visible when the predetermined situation is reached may be added. Further, it is not always necessary to directly add a pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that can be visually recognized under a predetermined situation to the symbol sheet 601, and another member overlapping the front side of the symbol sheet 601. A pattern (for example, a pattern 701) that becomes visible when a predetermined situation is reached may be added to the object, and for example, a slightly larger cylindrical shape is formed on the outside of each reel constituting the pattern sheet 601. The rotating body of the above is molded from a transparent resin and placed on the outside of each reel, a pattern 701 or the like is added to the rotating body, and a mechanism for rotating the rotating body by a sub-control board 940 is provided. The arrangement position of the design 701 or the like may be changed with respect to the design displayed in.

(3) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Third Embodiment In the above third embodiment, among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1, the number corresponding to the numerical value "7". A symbol 741A is provided around the main symbol 621A containing information, and among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the right symbol row Z2, the periphery of the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9". 741B is provided in the main symbol 741B, and among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3, the symbol 741C is provided around the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8". , The game mode currently set by the combination of the specific main symbols 621A can be suggested.

Instead of this, a pattern similar to the pattern 741A or the like is provided around a predetermined sub-symbol 621B provided on each symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, whereby the sub-symbol corresponding to the symbol is provided. The configuration may be such that the game mode currently set by the combination of the symbols 621B can be suggested.

In the third embodiment, the game mode currently set by the combination of the specific main symbols 621A can be suggested, but instead of or in addition to this, heating or heating is performed. By forming predetermined characters and symbols on the symbol sheet 601 as patterns that can be visually recognized under the circumstances, and displaying the characters and symbols according to the set game mode so as to be visible by heating or heating. A configuration capable of suggesting a set game mode may be adopted.

In the third embodiment, the game mode currently set is suggested by using a pattern that can be visually recognized in a heated or heated situation, but instead of this, a predetermined flash light or the like is used. It may be configured to suggest a game mode currently set by using a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of being exposed to the light of the above, or a pattern that can be visually recognized under the condition of irradiating the black light. Alternatively, a pattern that becomes visible under heating or heating, a pattern that becomes visible under a predetermined light such as a flash light, or a pattern that becomes visible under a black light irradiation. Two or three of these patterns may be used to suggest the currently set game mode.

(4) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Fourth Embodiment In the above fourth embodiment, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786. However, if the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is provided on one side of the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is not necessarily provided over the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786 on the peripheral side. It is not necessary, and for example, it may be provided in a partial section (for example, the lower half) on the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the fourth embodiment, the protruding portion 787 is provided between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view, but the protruding portion 787 is not provided. Therefore, in front view, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be adjacent to each other.

In the fourth embodiment, the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 are adjacent to each other, but the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 are close to each other, that is, direct light. There may be a configuration in which a region does not pass between the transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2, neither the direct light from the light emitting body 782 nor the specific reflected light by the reflection film portion 790B.

In the fourth embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not enter the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and is outward from the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (that is, the reflected light). The configuration is such that the light travels as light that is directly visible to the player in the transmission region X2 (outside the transmission region X2), but the specific reflected light does not travel outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (that is, the player directly travels). The reflective component 790 may be provided so that the light does not travel as visible light).

In the fourth embodiment, the reflective component 790 is arranged so that a part of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in the front view (that is, the non-overlapping region X3 exists). , The reflective parts 790 may be arranged so that all of them overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view (that is, arranged so that the non-overlapping region X3 does not exist). Alternatively, the reflective film portion 790B may be provided so as to overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 in the front view.

In the fourth embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 is the light (direct light or specific reflected light) corresponding to the light output from the light source 782. However, the light passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 corresponds to the light output from a light source different from the light directly passing through the light transmission region X1 (for example, a light source such as a full-color LED similar to the light emitter 782). It may be light. For example, a light emitting means different from the light emitting body 782, on the upper side of the reflective film portion 790B, a position where the output light can be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B and the reflected light can pass at least through the reflected light transmitting region X2. It may be provided in.

In the fourth embodiment, after being output from the light emitting body 782, the light is reflected on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and then the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 passes through the reflected light transmitting region X2. Although it is configured to pass through, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 and passing through the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 without entering the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is passed through the reflective film portion 790B. A reflective portion that can be reflected toward the surface may be provided, and the reflected light from the reflective portion may be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B and enter the reflected light transmitting region X2 and pass therethrough.

(5) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Fifth Embodiment In the above fifth embodiment, when a predetermined reach display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621. Is a reach that cannot appear in the predetermined reach display, while the first suggestion effect in which a character capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state appears can be executed (selectable) with a predetermined probability. When the display (specifically, the reach display consisting of even numerical values) is displayed, it corresponds to (corresponds to) a cut-out image including a part of the character cut out from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect. The configuration in which the second suggestion effect in which the image appears can be executed (selectable) with a predetermined probability is illustrated.

As a suggestive effect that can be executed when a predetermined reach display (for example, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative symbol 1621 in place of or in addition to the configuration, the special gaming state is entered. After the appearance of an image containing a part of the character that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition of, the effect develops and finally the whole image of the character appears. Any of the suggestion effects in which the overall image of the character appears without appearing may be selected according to the selection probability preset for each suggestion effect.

Even in such a modified example, the moving image data corresponding to the suggestion effect in which the entire image of the character appears without the image including a part of the character appearing is diverted to suggest the character to be developed in the suggestion effect. Since an image that can be used as an image (that is, an image that includes a part of the character) can be generated, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effect while suppressing the cost for developing an image that suggests the character to be developed. ..

In addition, when the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is reserved in place of or in addition to the above configuration, a lottery of the special symbol for the reservation is reserved. Based on the result, an effect of pre-reading and notifying a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that occurs after one or more variable display is executed (hereinafter, the effect is also referred to as "pre-read effect"). In the configuration, an image including a part of a character that can appear in the variable display to be read ahead and can suggest the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific gaming state may be displayed. Also in such a modification, the image used for the pre-reading effect (that is, the character) by diverting the moving image data corresponding to the effect (suggestion effect) in which the character capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific gaming state appears. Since it is possible to generate an image including a part of the above, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect while suppressing the cost for developing the image for the look-ahead effect.

In the fifth embodiment, the image generated based on the image cut out from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol appears in the second suggestion effect. The image to appear in the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be generated based on the moving image data of the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol as in the first suggestion effect. For example, a big hit effect in which an image to appear in an effect such as a second suggestion effect is displayed during a special gaming state, or a so-called demo displayed when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. The configuration may be such that it is generated based on an image cut out from the moving image data of the effect or the moving image that is displayed other than the variable display of the special symbol such as the moving image on the screen.

In addition, based on an image generated based on a cut-out image from the video data of the first suggestion effect, an effect displayed other than the variable display of a special symbol such as a big hit effect, or a cut-out image from the video data of the video. It is not always necessary to make the generated image appear in the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol such as the second suggestion effect. For example, it may appear on the demo screen or a special effect such as a big hit effect. It may be configured to appear in an effect displayed other than the variable display of the symbol.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, a plurality of cutout images (for example, each part of the regions AR1, AR2, AR3) cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect are cut out. Although the image corresponding to the image) is displayed, the number of images cut out from the frame image in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be a plurality, and may be one.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect appears. Although it is configured, the cutout image used for the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, and the cutout image of a plurality of frames in the moving image data. It may be an image cut out from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestion effect, an image corresponding to an image cut out from an image of a different frame may appear at the same time.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822) including a part of the characters that can appear in the first suggestion effect generated from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect. , 823), but the background data common to the second suggestion effect is prepared regardless of the type of character, and the background data includes an image containing a part of the character. May be good.

In the fifth embodiment, an image generated based on a cutout image from the moving image data of the first suggestion effect is displayed in the second suggestion effect, but an image corresponding to the cutout image is prepared in advance. The configuration may be such that the data is stored in the sub-control board 940. Even in such a modified example, it is easy to reduce the need to develop the moving image data used for the second suggestion effect, and the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect appears. Although it is configured, the cutout image used for the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, and the cutout image of a plurality of frames in the moving image data. It may be an image cut out from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestion effect, an image corresponding to an image cut out from an image of a different frame may appear at the same time.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, all the images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to the image cut out from the image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect are simultaneously displayed. Although the configuration is set to appear, it is not always necessary to display the images corresponding to all the cropped images at the same time. For example, there may be a configuration in which images corresponding to a plurality of cropped images are sequentially displayed one or a plurality at a time, or a configuration in which these images are divided into a plurality of groups and each group is sequentially switched and displayed. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the cutout image is generated from the image of the frame constituting the moving image data of the first suggestion effect, but the cutout image is generated from the still image data used for the first suggestion effect. There may be.

In the fifth embodiment, each region to be cut out in the frame image constituting the moving image data of the first suggestion effect has the same position regardless of the character type (for example, characters CA1, CA2, CA3). Although the configuration is set to the same size, the position and size of the area to be cut out in the frame image may be different for each type of character.

In the fifth embodiment, the image appearing in the second suggestion effect (an image including a part of the character suggesting the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state) is 1 in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect. An example is shown in the case where the image cut out from the image of the frame is an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) that has been subjected to processing such as deformation and enlargement / reduction. The image that appears in the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be a processed cut-out image, and is cut out from an unprocessed cut-out image (that is, an image of one frame in the moving image data of the first suggestion effect). Image) may be used. Further, the image displayed in the second suggestion effect may have a configuration in which an unprocessed cutout image and a processed cutout image are mixed.

In the fifth embodiment, the deformation and enlargement / reduction of the image are exemplified as the processing to be applied to the cut-out image, but the cut-out image may be processed to give a predetermined effect such as halo or mosaic. In addition, when a cut-out image to which a predetermined effect is given appears in the second suggestion effect, the effect diminishes with the passage of time (that is, it returns to the original cut-out image). You may.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, when a plurality of processed cutout images (images corresponding to the cutout images) are simultaneously configured in the second suggestion effect, the processed cutout image of 1 is used. An example is illustrated in which the other processed cutout image of 1 partially overlaps (for example, a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 overlap). The configuration may be such that a plurality of processed cutout images of the above are overlapped. Further, at least one of the plurality of processed cutout images may be completely invisible due to overlapping with other images.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the character appearing in the first suggestion effect suggests the degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state is illustrated, but the content suggested by the character is not necessarily the special gaming state. It does not have to be the degree of expectation for the transition of, but may be the degree of expectation for the transition to another gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state).

In the fifth embodiment, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as an image display device capable of variablely displaying the decorative symbol 1621 which is an image. In the configuration in which the variation display of the above is performed by the reel device, an image display device may be separately provided, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device.

(6) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 capable of pushing downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment. , The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device capable of pushing operation in a direction other than the downward direction. For example, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to a pressing operation device capable of an upward pushing operation or a pressing operation device capable of a substantially horizontal pushing operation such as a right direction. The position of the operation unit in the horizontal direction may be controlled, or the reaction force against the movement operation to the operation unit may be controlled.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853, and the operating mechanism 860 that enables the button operating portion 850 to move in the vertical direction are provided. Although the provided pressing operation device 1261 is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, it is not limited to the input operating device capable of pushing operation such as the pressing operating device 1261, and an input operation different from the pushing operation is possible. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to the input operating device.

For example, an input operation device such as a joystick provided with an operation lever (rod-shaped body) capable of input operations such as pushing and pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum, and a dial device that can rotate around a substantially center. The input operating device may be configured to apply the characteristic configuration according to the sixth embodiment. That is, when the lever is moved from the initial position in a predetermined direction (for example, the operating direction of the lever centered on the fulcrum, the circumferential direction around the axis, etc.), it can be restored to the initial position by the restoring force of the elastic body. The configuration may be such that the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to the input operating device. Further, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to an operating device including an operating unit capable of moving in a plurality of directions (for example, moving downward and rotating around the moving direction). You may.

In the sixth embodiment, the coil spring is exemplified as the spring member 853, but it does not necessarily have to be a coil spring and may be a leaf spring or the like. Further, an elastic body (for example, rubber) other than the spring member may be interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is a component of the button operating portion 850 that can be moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860, and the button operating portion 850 is based on the spring member 853. Although the configuration is such that it can move (vibrate) in the vertical direction with respect to the 851, the operated portion similar to the operated portion 852 may be provided on the upper end side of the rack 861 of the operating mechanism 860. That is, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 may be the same stroke amount as the stroke amount S2 by the operating mechanism 860. Even in such a configuration, the stroke amount by the pushing operation can be variably configured as in the pressing operation device 1261 in which the operated portion 852 includes the button operating portion 850 as illustrated in the sixth embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is movable with respect to the substrate 851 via the spring member 853 has been illustrated, but the spring member 853 is omitted and the operated portion is omitted. The position and reaction force may be controlled by the operating mechanism 860 in a state where the 852 and the base 851 are integrated.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is operated via the operation cover member 870, but the operated portion 852 and the operation cover member 870 are integrated. The player may directly operate the operated portion 852.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the button operation unit 850 is moved in the vertical direction by the operating mechanism 860 to generate a reaction force has been illustrated, but another mechanism for moving the button operation unit 850 and generating the reaction force is different. A mechanism may be used. For example, the substrate of the button operation unit 850 is provided with a cylindrical portion having a central axis along the moving direction, a spiral groove is formed around the cylindrical portion, and the groove is fitted into the groove to be constant. A rotatable engaging portion is provided by the motor 863 at the height position of the above, and the cylindrical portion is moved up and down by the rotation of the engaging portion to move the button operation portion 850 in the vertical direction. Or you may try to generate a reaction force.

In the sixth embodiment, the height of the neutral position (neutral position of the button operation unit 850) of the pressing operation device 1261 is changed according to the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held. The condition for changing the neutral position of the device 1261 does not necessarily have to be when the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is held changes. For example, when the number of operations of the pressing operation device 1261 (operated portion 852) operated during a predetermined effect (for example, an effect executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times, the pressing operation device 1261 The neutral position may change. That is, the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 may change according to the number of operations of the pressing operation device 1261 operated during a predetermined effect.

In the sixth embodiment, the detection sensor 854 capable of detecting that the operated portion 852 has reached the maximum pressing position and the button operating portion 850 have reached the position at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860. A detection sensor 890 that can be detected is provided, and the sub-control board 840 determines whether or not there is an operation on the pressing operation device 1261 based on each detection signal from the detection sensors 854 and 890.

Instead of this, the lowermost position where the lower end of the operation cover member 870 that moves constantly with the operated portion 852 can be reached (that is, the button operation portion 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the operating mechanism 860). Further, a detection sensor capable of detecting (the position of the lower end of the operation cover member 870 that can be reached when the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853) is provided, and based on the detection signal from the detection sensor. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of an operation on the pressing operation device 1261.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operating portion 850 in which the operated portion 852 is supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853, and the operating mechanism 860 that enables the button operating portion 850 to move in the vertical direction are provided. Although the provided pressing operation device 1261 is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an accessory device or the like that does not have an operation function. For example, the sixth aspect of the accessory device is provided with an accessory component in which the accessory is supported by the substrate via a spring member and an operating mechanism that enables the accessory component to move in the vertical direction. The configuration according to the embodiment may be applied.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the hold count display unit 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870 has been illustrated. It is possible to display an object whose display is switched according to the expected degree of transition of. For example, if the letter "V" is printed under the number "8" on the hold count display unit 870A and the button operation unit 850 in a raised state according to the hold number is pressed, the player wins. If there is a unit game, the operation cover member 870 rises for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) until the character "V" is visible to the player, and then returns to the original position and wins. If there is no unit game, the character "V" may be returned to the original position without being visible.

Further, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily change according to the number of holds. For example, the number "8" can be seen by the player regardless of the number of holds. When the button operation unit 850 is arranged, the right of the unit game is reserved, and the player pushes in the situation where there is a variable display waiting for execution, the winning or expectation is high based on the result of the winning / losing lottery. The reaction force is increased at the height position according to the number of times of the fluctuation display until the time when the fluctuation display is performed (for example, the height position lowered by one scale in the case of the next fluctuation display), and the reaction force is generated. Depending on the height position to be performed, it may be possible to suggest to the player the execution time of the variation display that can hold the correctness or the degree of expectation, or the magnitude of the reaction force may be set to a plurality of types to have a high degree of expectation. It may be configured to suggest this to the player.

Further, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily change according to the number of holds. For example, during the change display, the result of the winning / failing lottery during the change display or the hold waiting for the execution of the change display. Based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the button operation unit 850 rises to one of the heights (neutral position) set according to the winning or expectation, and the reaction force when pushing it in. It may be configured to suggest to the player that the larger the size of is, the higher the expected effect is executed in the variable display.

(7) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the 7th Embodiment In the 7th embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, and the operating surface 870B is vertically (pressing operation) with the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. The position is substantially equal to the moving direction of the device 1261), but the pressing operation device 1261 is positioned so that the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 in the neutral position. It may be a positioned configuration. Also in the configuration of the modified example, as in the configuration illustrated in the seventh embodiment, the pushing operation with momentum such as hitting the operation surface 870B by the player who performs the pushing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed. Instead, it is possible to perform a pushing operation of slowly pushing the operation surface 870B against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a downward pushing operation with respect to the operating surface 870B is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but the direction other than the downward direction with respect to the operating surface is illustrated. (For example, a configuration in which the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment is applied to a pressing operation device similar to the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a pushing operation in the forward direction, left or right direction) may be used.

That is, for example, in a pressing operation device that performs a pushing operation in the forward direction with respect to the operating surface, the operating surface is the opening surface of the opening accommodating the pressing operation device and the front and rear directions of movement of the pressing operation device. The position may be substantially equal to the direction. Further, in such a pressing operation device, the operation surface may be configured to be recessed in the front-rear direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening accommodating the pressing operation device.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 in which the operation surface 870B is located at a position substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but is neutral. As the position, a plurality of types of neutral positions are taken, including at least a position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction, or a position where the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R. A configuration may be used in which the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment is applied to the pressing operation device 1261 to be obtained.

In the seventh embodiment, as an example in FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B)), a part of the wrist side of the player's hand (a part of the hand excluding a part of the finger side). ) And a part of the wrist side of the forearm portion can be supported (placeable) on the wrist stand 895, but the hand rest 895 is not necessarily a part of the wrist side of the player's hand. It is not necessary to have a configuration that can support both a part of the forearm portion on the wrist side, and the player can operate the operated portion 852 by hand so that the player can operate the part of the hand and the hand continuously. It suffices as long as it can support at least a part of the forearm portion.

Therefore, for example, the hand rest 895 may have a configuration in which only a part of the wrist side of the player's hand operably supports the operated portion with the finger side of the hand, or the forearm portion of the player. A part or all of the above may be configured to operably support the operated portion on the finger side of the hand corresponding to the forearm portion.

In the seventh embodiment, the hand rest 895 has a substantially flat upper surface capable of supporting a part of the wrist side of the player's hand and a part of the wrist side of the forearm from below. However, the form of the hand rest 895 does not necessarily have to be the form of a stand having a substantially flat upper surface in the horizontal direction, for example, a shape that rises according to the shape of the hand or forearm. It may be. Further, for example, the forearm portion may be supported from the lower side in a substantially U-shaped cuff shape, or the forearm portion may be suspended from the upper side.

In the seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is located at a position substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 and the vertical direction which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261 (moving direction of the operated portion 852). However, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is located above the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893, and the upper surface of the hand rest 895 and the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. May be configured to be a step in the vertical direction.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 capable of pushing downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but an input operation such as pushing or pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum is performed. The characteristic of the seventh embodiment is that the input operation device such as a joystick provided with an operation lever (rod-shaped body) capable of being operated and the input operation device such as a dial device that can rotate about a substantially center as an axis. It may be a configuration to which the configuration is applied.

That is, for example, with respect to an input operation device such as a joystick or an input operation device such as a dial device, a portion of the player's hand excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operated portion of the input operation device. A support portion such as a hand rest 895 that allows the player to operate the operated portion by hand at least a part of the forearm portion continuous with the hand is provided to the player by the input operating device. It may be configured to be provided on the near side.

(8) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the 8th Embodiment In the 8th embodiment, the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during the non-gaming state of waiting for the player to execute the game is An example is shown in which a moving image or an image obtained by diverting moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 during variable display is illustrated, but it is not always a customer waiting effect. It is not necessary that all of the above are composed of videos or images diverted from video data prepared in advance for various productions, and at least a part of the customer waiting production is composed of videos or images diverted from the video data. It may be a configuration. For example, a video or image dedicated to the waiting-for-customer production is prepared, and the waiting-for-customer production is composed of a video or image dedicated to the waiting-for-customer production and a video or image diverted from video data prepared in advance for various productions. It may be configured.

In the eighth embodiment, the customer waiting effect is configured from the moving image or image cut out from the suggestion effect, but the moving image or image constituting the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be the moving image or image cut out from the suggestion effect. For example, a moving image or an image cut out from an effect other than the suggestion effect (variable effect) displayed during the variable display may be used as a part of the customer waiting effect.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as a pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state, a special symbol (first special symbol, second) is performed during the game. The variation display (variation effect) selected under the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol) is displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but the variation display is displayed during the non-game state. The trigger does not necessarily have to be an operation on the pressing operation device (specifically, a pushing operation), and an operation other than the pushing operation on the input operating device other than the pressing operation device is an opportunity to display the fluctuation display. It may be configured as follows. For example, a predetermined rotation operation (for example, one rotation operation clockwise or 200 rpm or more) is performed on a rotation operation device capable of rotation operation such as the rotation operation device 262 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state. When a rotation operation based on the number of rotations is performed, a variation display selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. May be good.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game. The selected variation display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but the selection conditions for the variation display do not necessarily have to be the same as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs, and the non-game When the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the state, the variable display selected under substantially the same selection conditions as the case where the start prize of the special symbol occurs is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. You may.

For example, the probability of selecting a demo pseudo jackpot by the demo pseudo-winning random number counter included in the sub-control board 940 does not necessarily have to be the same as the jackpot winning probability by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920. However, for example, the probability of selecting the demo pseudo jackpot by the demo pseudo-winning random number counter may be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. According to such a configuration, the variable display (variable effect) displayed only when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery can be pushed into the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state (more specifically, during the non-gaming state). When it is done), it can be made easier to appear than during the game. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 100 appear in the non-gaming state, which is difficult to appear due to the winning probability of the big hit during the game, and to easily appeal the pachinko machine 100 to the player. Further, the probability of winning a big hit against the variable display executed during the non-game state is set to 100%, and only the variable display (variable effect) executed when the big hit occurs is executed during the non-game state. In this case, the demo pseudo-winning random number counter may be omitted.

Alternatively, various selection probabilities in the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, or the first demo pseudo variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo variation type counter provided in the sub-control board 940. However, the configuration may be different from the various selection probabilities of the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, or the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter provided in the main control board 920.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game. The selected variation display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-game state, the game is in progress. From the variable display that can be selected when the start prize of the special symbol occurs in, the selection condition for exclusive use in the non-gaming state (for example, for demonstration), which is different from the selection condition when the start prize of the special symbol occurs. It may be configured to select the variable display to be displayed in the non-game state by the selection probability of the demonstration pseudo jackpot by the pseudo-winning random number counter.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pushing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol start winning is generated during the game. The selected variation display (variation effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, regardless of whether the display is in a non-game state or in a game, the input operation device such as the pressing operation device is used. Provide a period during which a predetermined operation (for example, a pushing operation) for displaying the fluctuation display can be input, and press during the period (a state in which a predetermined operation can be input to the input operation device). When a predetermined operation is performed (input) on the operation device or input operation device, the variable display selected under the same or substantially the same selection conditions as when the start prize of the special symbol occurs is the decorative symbol. It may be configured to be displayed on the display device 479.

(9) Modification Example of Pachinko Machine 100 of the 9th Embodiment In the 9th embodiment, in the variation display based on the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, the pseudo variation display for demonstration). Although four suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state depending on the display content are simultaneously displayed in the divided display areas 479D to 479G in the decorative symbol display device 479, the configuration has been illustrated. Instead of or in addition to this, two or more display images (eg,) each including any of a plurality of types of suggestion displays 1623 having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state due to differences in the content of the comments (eg, The four display images including the suggestion display 1623 of different types) may be simultaneously displayed in each display area (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in which the decorative symbol display device 479 is divided into a plurality of parts.

In the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state (that is, a pseudo variable display for demonstration), two or more display images including each of the different types of suggestion display 1623 are decorative symbol display devices. In the configuration in which the 479 is simultaneously displayed in each display area divided into a plurality of parts, the period from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state to the appearance of the display image including the suggestion display 1623. In the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, the variable display may be displayed at a higher speed than the corresponding period.

As a result, the time from the start of the variation display based on the push operation to the pressing operation device in the non-gaming state to the appearance of the suggestion effect after the reach display as described above is the variation based on the start prize of the special symbol. Similar to the case where the time is shorter than the corresponding time in the display, the time from the start to the end in the pseudo-variation display for demonstration can be set to be shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. it can.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state depending on the display content, and expectations for the transition to the special gaming state according to the shape thereof. A display image including a plurality of types of hold display 1622 having different degrees is simultaneously displayed in a plurality of divided display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative symbol display device 479.

On the other hand, when a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, it is not always necessary to display a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects and a display image including a plurality of types of hold display 1622 at the same time. During the period in which the display image of is displayed, the display image is sequentially displayed each time a predetermined operation is performed on an input operation device (for example, selection operation device 263) different from the press operation device such as the press operation device 261. It may be configured to switch.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects and a display image including a plurality of types of hold display 1622 are divided into a plurality of display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative symbol display device 479. ), So that the images (frame images) that make up the variable display, such as the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol, are displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. It was configured to be displayed in a smaller size than when it was displayed in.

Instead of this, the display image including the suggestion effect and the display image including the hold display 1622 are displayed one by one, and the image constituting the variable display such as the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol is the decorative symbol display device 479. It may be configured to be displayed in a smaller size than when it is displayed on the entire display area.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of alternative display 1625, a display image including each of the different types of alternative display 1625 may be simultaneously displayed in each display area divided into a plurality of decorative symbol display devices 479. Even in such a configuration, the display image including each of the alternative display 1625 can be displayed in a smaller and reduced size as compared with the case where the display image including each of the alternative display 1625 is displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start prize of the special symbol.

(10) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on the condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems, effects, and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A translucent light-transmitting member (base material 611) having a front surface and a back surface which is a back surface with respect to the front surface.
A pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) that can be visually recognized from the front surface side via the transmissive member.
A gaming machine including a decorative portion (decorative portion 622) provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member on the front surface side of the translucent member. ,
The decorative portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the decorative portion is colored with a color configured to easily reflect light as compared with at least a part of the colors that color the pattern.

<Feature 11>
A translucent light-transmitting member (base material 611) having a front surface and a back surface which is a back surface with respect to the front surface.
A pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) that can be visually recognized from the front surface side via the transmissive member.
A gaming machine including a decorative portion (decorative portion 622) provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member on the front surface side of the translucent member. ,
The decorative portion protrudes toward the surface side from the portion where the pattern portion is provided on the surface side, and is colored with a color configured to easily reflect light as compared with at least a part of the colors that color the pattern. A featured game machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 10 or the feature 11 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, a pattern portion including a pattern is provided on the back surface side of the translucent translucent member. The pattern of the pattern portion can be visually recognized from the surface side of the translucent member through the translucent member. On the other hand, a decorative portion is provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the translucent member on the front surface side of the translucent member. Therefore, while the pattern portion is provided on the back surface side of the translucent member, the decorative portion is provided on the front surface side of the translucent member, so that the decorative portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the decorative portion can be improved.

In particular, the decorative portion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion is colored with a color configured to reflect light more easily than at least a part of the colors for coloring the pattern of the pattern portion. Glittering and gorgeousness is added to the color, which makes it possible to more preferably improve the decorative feeling of the decorative portion.

By improving the decorative feeling of the decorative portion, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the pattern (the pattern of the pattern portion) provided on the peripheral side of the decorative portion, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. Can be done.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 11, as "at least a part of the colors that color the pattern", for example, a main color that colors each pattern (for example, a color that colors the largest area in each pattern). It may be the color that most easily reflects light (for example, the color that has the highest brightness), or it may be the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color all the patterns. Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 11, the "color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined by, for example, the presence or absence of brilliance, and is defined by the brightness of the color. There may be.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 10 or feature 11.
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The design portion includes a design (decorative design 621) as the design, and a coating film is formed on the back surface side of the translucent member.
The decorative portion is formed with a coating film on the surface side of the translucent member.
The translucent member is a gaming machine characterized in that the back surface side on which the pattern portion is formed is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion and is attached to the outer peripheral surface.

In the game machine according to the feature 12, since the translucent member is attached to the outer peripheral surface with the back surface side on which the pattern portion is formed facing the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion, the symbol included in the symbol portion is reeled. It is possible to make a variable display or a stop display (confirmed display) by rotating the unit. Since a decorative portion is formed on the surface side of the translucent member, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the variable display and the stop display (confirmed display) of the design.

<Feature 20>
It is provided with a mode changing portion that enables the mode of a predetermined surface portion to be visually recognized in a different mode depending on the situation.
Depending on the presence or absence of light (flash) radiated from the surface side to the surface portion or the color of the light (black light), the mode changing portion determines the color or display target or the combination of the color and the display target according to the situation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is made visible to the player in a mode.

<Feature 21>
Equipped with a pattern part provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down,
The pattern portion is different from the first pattern (picture 701, picture 702, picture 703) that becomes visible in a predetermined first situation in a mode corresponding to the first situation. A gaming machine comprising a second pattern (pictures 721A, 721B) that can be visually recognized in a mode corresponding to the second situation in a predetermined second situation.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Further, in the game machine according to the feature 21, the pattern portion provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down can be visually recognized in a predetermined first situation in a mode corresponding to the first situation. The first situation includes a first picture that is visible and a second picture that becomes visible in a predetermined second situation different from the first situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation. It is possible to visually display different patterns (first pattern or second pattern) in the second situation and the second situation. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine by different patterns that can be visually recognized depending on the situation.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21.
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The pattern portion is formed with a coating film on one surface side of a sheet-like translucent member.
The translucent member is a gaming machine characterized in that the back surface side is attached to the reel portion.

In the game machine according to the feature 22, a sheet-like translucent member having a coating film formed on one surface of the pattern portion is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel portion, so that the degree of attention to the reel portion is improved. Can be done. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the symbol is fluctuated or stopped (confirmed) displayed by the rotation of the reel portion, the first symbol can be visually displayed in the first situation, or in the second situation. By visually displaying the second pattern, the degree of attention to the reel portion can be suitably improved.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to any one of feature 20 to feature 22.
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information, and
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entry port as a condition for satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a lottery means (main control board 920).
When the start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit, and then the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. Means (sub-control board 940) and
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variable execution means, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state, which is a different game state, and
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined Setting storage means (main control) that stores probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. Input means (rear surface) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of changing the probability information stored in the board 920 RAM) and the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. Setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
A setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means is provided.
At least one of the first pattern and the second pattern has a different mode depending on the situation within the fluctuation range in the first situation or the second situation, which can be changed in a predetermined fluctuation range. It is made visible at
At least one of the first situation and the second situation so that the pattern can be visually recognized in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine comprising a situation generating means (sub-control board 940) for generating a situation within the fluctuation range.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 23, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit by the variable execution means, and then the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed. The corresponding identification information is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is generated by the game control means after the stop display is displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability in which a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, the probability information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. In the input means, the operation information corresponding to the operation of changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting changing means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the situation generating means makes it possible to visually recognize at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. , At least one of the first situation and the second situation occurs within the fluctuation range of each situation (first situation, second situation).

Thereby, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability in which the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability in which the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. The information to be used can be suggested to the player based on the difference in the mode of at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern. Therefore, the player can add the game property of estimating the probability information about the game machine being played according to the difference in the mode of at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern. For example, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine by considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or a different game machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature 30>
A first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position and
A second decorative portion (peripheral side decorative portion 788) provided on one side of the first decorative portion, and
A light emitting means (light emitting body 782) that is provided on a side away from the player from the second decorative portion and outputs light is provided.
The second decorative part is
A first transmitting portion (direct light transmitting region X1) capable of transmitting a part of the light output from the light emitting means, and
With a reflecting means (reflecting film portion 790B) that is a part of the light output from the light emitting means and can reflect the light that has returned to the light emitting means side without entering the inside of the first transmitting portion to the player side. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

<Feature 31>
A first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position and
A second decorative portion (peripheral side decorative portion 788) provided on one side of the first decorative portion, and
A light emitting means (light emitting body 782) that is provided on a side away from the player from the second decorative portion and outputs light, and
A reflecting means (reflecting film portion 790B) capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means is provided.
The second decorative part is
A first transmitting portion (direct light transmitting region X1) capable of directly transmitting the light output from the light emitting means, and
A gaming machine comprising a second transmitting portion (reflected light transmitting region X2) capable of transmitting light reflected by the reflecting means adjacent to or close to the first transmitting portion.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 30 or the feature 31 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the first decorative portion is provided at a predetermined position, and the second decorative portion is provided on one side of the first decorative portion. The second decorative portion includes a first transmissive portion and a second transmissive portion adjacent to or adjacent to the first transmissive portion. The first transmitting portion is configured to be able to directly transmit the light output from the light emitting means, whereas the second transmitting portion is formed by a reflecting means capable of reflecting the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means. It is configured to be able to transmit the reflected light. Therefore, the appearance of light visually recognized by the player (for example, brightness, color, etc.) can be different between the first transmissive portion and the second transmissive portion. As a result, in the second decorative portion, the way of shining can be made different between the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion, so that the decorativeness by the light transmitted through the second decorative portion can be improved.

Further, since the intensity of the reflected light is generally smaller than the intensity of the incident light, the intensity of the light transmitted through the second transmitting portion can be weakened as compared with the intensity of the light transmitted through the first transmitting portion. .. As a result, in the second decorative portion, the second transmissive portion can appear to shine weaker than the first transmissive portion. Therefore, since it is possible to change the way in which the second decorative portion shines, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative portion in this respect as well.

As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the feature 30 or the feature 31, the second decorative portion and the second decorative portion are on one side due to the improvement of the decorativeness by the light transmitted through the second decorative portion. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the first decorative portion provided on the side, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 31, the "light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means" that can be reflected by the reflecting means is the direct light that directly reaches the reflecting means after being output from the light emitting means. It may be indirect light reflected by one or a plurality of planes different from the reflecting means between the time when it is output from the light emitting means and the time when it reaches the reflecting means.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31.
The second transparent portion is arranged on the end side of the second decorative portion, which is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion and away from the first decorative portion.
The reflecting means is provided below the second transmitting portion, and reflects the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means toward the upper side and the side away from the first decorative portion. A part of the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transmitting portion, and the other part does not pass through the second transmitting portion and is directly visible to the player on the outer side of the second decorative portion. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to travel as possible light.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 32, the second transparent portion in the second decorative portion is arranged on the end side of the second decorative portion which is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion and away from the first decorative portion in the second decorative portion. .. The reflecting means provided below the second transmitting portion reflects the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means toward the upper side and the side away from the first decorative portion, and is reflected by the reflecting means. A part of the reflected light passes through the second transmitting portion, and the other part travels outside the second decorative portion as light that can be directly seen by the player without passing through the second transmitting portion. Is configured. How the light is seen by the player depending on whether the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transmitting portion or travels on the outer side of the second transmitting portion as light that the player can directly see. Since (for example, brightness, brilliance, etc.) can be changed, the decorativeness of the light reflected by the reflecting means is improved.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 32.
The game machine is characterized in that a part of the reflecting means is exposed on the outer side of the second transmitting portion without overlapping the second transmitting portion when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. ..

In the game machine according to the feature 33, a part of the reflecting means is exposed on the outer side of the second transmitting portion without overlapping the second transmitting portion when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. Therefore, the player has a mixture of light reflected by the reflecting means and light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means by the reflecting means on the outer side of the second transmitting portion. Can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the light that can be visually recognized by the player is different from the case where the reflecting means is only the light that reflects the natural light.

<Feature 34>
The gaming machine according to feature 32 or feature 33.
The light emitting means is provided on the lower side with respect to the second decorative portion, and is configured to be able to output light toward the second decorative portion.
When the light output from the light emitting means arrives, the second decorative portion is configured such that a part thereof passes through the first transmitting portion and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means. A game machine characterized by being played.

In the game machine according to the feature 34, when the light output from the light emitting means provided on the lower side with respect to the second decorative portion toward the second decorative portion reaches the second decorative portion, the light emitting means thereof. Since a part is configured to pass through the first transmitting portion and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means, light is transmitted to the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion by a common light emitting means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the light emitting means from becoming complicated, and it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost by standardizing the light emitting means for transmitting light to the first transmitting portion and the second transmitting portion.

<Feature 35>
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature 30 to feature 34
The first decorative portion has translucency and is transparent.
A protrusion (projection portion 787) provided along the peripheral edge on the peripheral edge side of the surface to be the front surface side of the first decorative portion on the side where the second decorative portion is provided.
A decorative member (decorative sheet 789) provided on the back surface side of the first decorative portion, which is a back surface with respect to the front surface, and includes contents that can be visually recognized from the front surface side via the first decorative portion. Prepare
A portion (end face 787A) visible from at least the front side of the protruding portion is processed so as to look like a color that easily reflects light as compared with at least a part of the colors contained in the decorative member. Game machine.

In the game machine according to the feature 35, on the back surface side of the first decorative portion having translucency, the contents that can be visually recognized from the front surface side of the first decorative portion via the first decorative portion. Decorative members including are provided. On the other hand, on the peripheral edge side of the surface of the first decorative portion on the side where the second decorative portion is provided, a protruding portion is provided along the peripheral edge. Therefore, while the decorative member is provided on the back surface side of the first decorative portion, the protruding portion is provided on the front surface side of the first decorative portion, so that the protruding portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member. it can. Thereby, the decorative feeling by the protruding portion can be improved.

In particular, the projecting portion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member is processed so as to look like a color that reflects light more easily than at least a part of the colors contained in the decorative member. Can be improved more preferably.

<Feature 40>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) as an effect that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
As an image used for a predetermined second effect different from the first effect, a display control means (secondary) for displaying an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit. With a control board 940)
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image is displayed on the display unit in a deformed state or a processed state.

<Feature 41>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
When a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. Is provided with a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the image on the display unit.
When the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means displays the effect image on the display unit in a state where the effect image is not deformed or processed. When the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, an image of at least one region cut out from the effect image is displayed on the display unit in a state of being subjected to the predetermined deformation or the predetermined processing. A game machine characterized by that.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 40 or the feature 41 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, the display unit can display the effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores an effect image used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least one area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit by the display control means. The image of is displayed on the display unit in a state of being subjected to a predetermined deformation or a predetermined process. Therefore, since the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit is diverted in the second effect, the storage amount of the effect image can be suppressed, and the first effect and the second effect can be suppressed, respectively. It is easy to reduce the need to develop a production image, and the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in the second effect, an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed is used for the first effect. Similarly, it can be suggested when the second effect using the image cut out from the image is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation, reliability), the ease of transition to the special game state can be determined. The degree can also be suggested by the display of the second effect. Further, since the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances, the suggestion of the event can be realized with different appearances. It is possible to increase the variation of the production while suppressing the cost for developing the production image.

Here, in the second effect, since the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed, the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It can be difficult to guess. As a result, it is possible to make the difficulty of estimating the expected event after the display of the first effect or the second effect different between the case where the first effect is displayed and the case where the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the 1st effect or the 2nd effect is displayed (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state), thereby, to the gaming machine. The degree of attention can be improved.

In particular, since the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in a state of being deformed or processed in the second effect, the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It is possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the effect image of.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40 or feature 41.
When the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means fronts at least a part of the images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a deformed or processed state so that it can be seen facing in substantially the same direction different from the direction.

In the game machine described in feature 42, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, it is cut out from the effect image (effect image used for the first effect) stored in the storage unit by the display control means. At least a part of the images of the plurality of regions is displayed in a deformed or processed state so that the images can be seen facing substantially the same direction different from the front direction. As a result, it is possible to give an orderly impression as compared with the case where the images of the plurality of regions are displayed so as to be viewed in different directions.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42.
The display control means is an image of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, and is in a deformed or processed state. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one image of the above images is displayed so as to be overlapped with another image.

In the game machine described in feature 43, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, it is cut out from the effect image (effect image used for the first effect) stored in the storage unit by the display control means. Since at least one of the images in a plurality of regions that have been deformed or processed is displayed so as to overlap with the other images, the content of the superimposed image is displayed to the player. It can be difficult to recognize. In this respect as well, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the effect image corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed (for example, the ease of transition to the special gaming state). , It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

<Feature 50>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) as an effect that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
As an image used for a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect, at least an image corresponding to an image of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine including a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a part of images on the display unit at the same time.

<Feature 51>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores an effect image (moving image data) used for a predetermined first effect (first suggestion effect) among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit, and
When a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, the image of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed. A gaming machine including a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying at least a part of the corresponding images on the display unit at the same time.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 50 or the feature 51 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, the display unit can display the effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores an effect image used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit by the display control means. At least a part of the images corresponding to the images is displayed on the display unit at the same time. Therefore, since the effect image used for the first effect stored in the storage unit is diverted in the second effect, the storage amount of the effect image can be suppressed, and the first effect and the second effect can be suppressed, respectively. It is easy to reduce the need to develop a production image, and the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the image corresponding to the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed in the second effect, the event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed is the first. The same can be suggested when a second effect using an image cut out from the effect image used for the effect is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation, reliability), the ease of transition to the special game state can be determined. The degree can also be suggested by the display of the second effect. Further, since the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of the event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances, the suggestion of the event can be realized with different appearances. It is possible to increase the variation of the production while suppressing the cost for developing the production image.

Here, in the second effect, since the image corresponding to the image of the region cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed, the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to guess the production image of. As a result, it is possible to make the difficulty of estimating the expected event after the display of the first effect or the second effect different between the case where the first effect is displayed and the case where the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the playability of estimating an event that can be expected after the 1st effect or the 2nd effect is displayed (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state), thereby, to the gaming machine. The degree of attention can be improved.

In particular, since at least a part of the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of regions cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed at the same time, for example, the image corresponding to the images of the plurality of regions is displayed. Compared with the case where one of the images is displayed alone, it is easier to guess which effect image in the first effect corresponds to the image displayed in the second effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent it from becoming too difficult to infer the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second effect.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 51, the "image corresponding to the image of the plurality of regions cut out from the effect image" has the same appearance as the image of the plurality of regions cut out from the effect image. It may be an image, it may be a substantially same image, it may be an image that displays an image cut out from a production image with the same appearance, or it may be an image that displays the cut out image. It may be a deformed or processed image.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51.
In the display control means, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least one of the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of cut out regions appears to overlap with the other images. A game machine characterized by displaying.

In the game machine described in feature 52, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means cuts out the effect image stored in the storage unit in association with the first effect. Since at least one of the images corresponding to the images in the plurality of areas is displayed so as to overlap with the other images, it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the superimposed images. it can. This makes it possible to preferably make it difficult to guess the production image of the first production corresponding to the image displayed in the second production.

<Feature 60>
It is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and can be arranged at a neutral position set at a plurality of locations in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Therefore, in each neutral position, when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction while deforming the elastic body (the operating means ( Button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870),
The operating means can be held in any of the neutral positions in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the operating means can be moved so that the position of the operating means can be moved without the player's operation on the operated portion. Acting means to operate (acting mechanism 860) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
The motion control means is a gaming machine including at least a control for moving the operation means at a speed at which an inertial force having a magnitude that deforms the elastic body is generated.

<Feature 61>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's operation is provided. It is an operating means located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operating portion is not operated, and when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is deformed by the elastic body to cause the operated portion to be the substrate. With respect to the operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the above.
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be set to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. Is an actuating means (acting mechanism 860) that moves in the opposite direction and
A gaming machine including an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 60 or the feature 61 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, in the operating means including the operated portion, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via the elastic body, the elastic body is deformed when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. This is configured so that the operated portion can be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

The operating means is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means in a predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Therefore, for example, the operating means is operated by the control by the motion controlling means, and the operating means stopped at the predetermined first position (that is, the operated portion is not operated) is moved to the first position. When moving from (for example, a neutral position) to a predetermined second position in a predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction and then stopping at the second position, the vehicle stops at the second position. In the operating means, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body can be moved along a predetermined direction by the inertial force received by the operated portion, and can be moved in a predetermined direction and the predetermined direction. It is also possible to make a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating in the direction opposite to the direction.

Alternatively, for example, when the operating means operates in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position with respect to the operated portion, the operating means from the neutral position to the predetermined direction. When the operation with respect to the operated portion is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion. In the case of the configuration of moving to the neutral position side, the operation means supported by the substrate via the elastic body in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force is completed. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, the portion can be made to reciprocate in a predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (reciprocating motion).

As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the feature 60 or the feature 61, the operating means including the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is operated by the operating means controlled by the motion controlling means. Since the position of is configured to be at least changeable, the vibration of the operated portion of the operating means reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated portion. It can be exercised (reciprocating motion).

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, it is possible to increase the interest in the operating means, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine. Further, even with simple movement control of the operating means, the operation of the operated portion can be complicated, and the tactile sensation when the player touches the operated portion can be changed.

<Feature 62>
The gaming machine according to feature 60 or feature 61.
When the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position with respect to the operated portion, the operating means moves from the neutral position to the predetermined direction. The operation means can be moved, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated portion, the operation on the operated portion is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is moved to the neutral position side when finished.

In the game machine according to the feature 62, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is in the neutral position. The operating means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated portion. Later, when the operation on the operated portion is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Therefore, since the position of the operating means can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operating means, the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion by the player's operation from the neutral position to the predetermined direction is the deformation of the elastic body. It is possible to increase the amount of movement of the operated portion, which is possible by the above method. This makes it possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated portion as compared with the case where the amount of movement of the operated portion is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the elastic body.

Further, when the motion control means is configured to control the actuating means so as to be able to change the holding force, the force by which the player operates the operated portion is variable in the area where the operating means is moved by the actuating means. Therefore, even in such a case, it is possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion.

<Feature 70>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable execution means (main control board 920) that displays the symbol in a variable manner on a predetermined display unit and then stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as a stop symbol.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display by the variable execution means. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, a predetermined storage unit (mainly) holds information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means up to a predetermined number. A gaming machine provided with a hold storage means (main control board 920) that is stored in the RAM of the control board 920) and holds the execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means.
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means and the magnitude of the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operation means is provided.
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so as to have an aspect according to at least one of the number of hold information (number of holds) stored in the hold storage means or the contents of the hold information. A gaming machine characterized by containing at least.

<Feature 71>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable execution means (main control board 920) that displays the symbol in a variable manner on a predetermined display unit and then stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as a stop symbol.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display by the variable execution means. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, a predetermined storage unit (mainly) holds information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means up to a predetermined number. A gaming machine provided with a hold storage means (main control board 920) that is stored in the RAM of the control board 920) and holds the execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means.
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the neutral position. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
The operation control means is such that the operation means moves to the neutral position determined in advance according to the number of hold information (the number of holds) stored in the hold storage means, or the player wears the cover. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is controlled so that the movement mode of the operating means when the operating unit is operated is a mode corresponding to the content of the holding information stored in the holding storage means.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 70 or the feature 71 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the feature 70 or the feature 71, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, the lottery result by the lottery means is performed by the hold storage means. The information corresponding to is stored in a predetermined storage unit as hold information up to a predetermined number, and is stored in the hold storage means in a configuration in which the execution of the variation display corresponding to the information by the variation execution means is suspended. The operation means is moved to a neutral position determined in advance according to the number of hold information, or the movement mode of the operation means when the operated portion is operated by the player is stored in the hold storage means. The operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means so that the mode corresponds to the content of the information.

By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion by the player's operation from the neutral position to a predetermined direction, thereby giving the operating feeling of the operating means. Can be diversified. Further, it is possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated portion by changing the movement mode of the operating means when the player operates the operated portion. By diversifying the operation feeling of the operation means, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

In addition, as the content of the pending information, the success or failure of the lottery result, the content of the effect selected based on the lottery result, and the like are exemplified.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 72, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature 80>
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
The motion control means satisfies a predetermined condition based on the game situation (for example, the number of holds, the time of the game, the number of times a predetermined effect (for example, the display of a specific character) is executed) or the lottery result of a predetermined lottery. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation of the operating means is controlled so that the operating means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the established condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions.

<Feature 81>
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the neutral position. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
The operation control means controls the operation means so that the operation means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the satisfied condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine featuring.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 80 or the feature 81 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating means is controlled by the operation controlling means so that the operating means moves to the neutral position corresponding to the satisfied condition among the plurality of predetermined neutral positions. .. By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated portion by the player's operation from the neutral position in a predetermined direction, whereby the player can change the operated portion. It is possible to diversify the feeling of operation when operating. By diversifying the operation feeling of the operation means, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

The "predetermined condition" described in the feature 81 includes, for example, when the number of times a unit game related to a special symbol is held changes, or during a predetermined effect (for example, an effect executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol). This may be the case when the number of operations of the operated portion that has been operated in the above reaches a predetermined number of times.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or feature 81.
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 82, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature 90>
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operating means (acting mechanism 860) that holds the operating means in the neutral position and enables the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates in the predetermined direction. ,
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means and the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operation means is provided.
The operation control means controls the operation means so that when the player operates the operation unit in the predetermined direction, the reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operation means changes. A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of patterns of changes in reaction force are set according to a lottery result or an expectation degree of a predetermined lottery.

<Feature 91>
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the neutral position. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means and the holding force can be changed at least can be provided.
The motion control means is said to be at a first position away from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is controlled so that a reaction force with respect to a moving operation of the operating means is changed.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 90 or the feature 91 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the holding force changes at the first position away from the neutral position in the predetermined direction. The operating means is controlled by the motion controlling means. As a result, when the player operates the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force, the operation feeling of the operation means changes at the first position during the operation, so that the operation feeling by the operation means becomes monotonous. However, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine. For example, as the operation feeling of the operation means, in addition to the control of the operation feeling against a certain reaction force with respect to the movement operation of the operation means, the control of the operation feeling in which the reaction force changes discontinuously is set. The reaction force to the movement operation of the operating means at one position can be changed.

<Feature 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 92, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature A0>
It is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is maintained in a predetermined neutral state in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the position of the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
With a detecting means (encoder, sub-control board 940) capable of detecting at least one of the moving amount of the operating means or the moving speed of the operated portion when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. ,
When at least one of the movement amount and the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, or becomes a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range, a predetermined display is performed. A unit (decorative symbol display device 479) is provided with an operation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display or operating a predetermined movable portion.
A gaming machine characterized in that two or more kinds of values corresponding to a lottery result of a predetermined lottery are set as the predetermined target value, the predetermined value, or the value within the predetermined range.

<Feature A1>
An operation that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by the operation of the player, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the neutral position. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
A detecting means capable of detecting at least one of the moving amount of the operating means or the moving speed of the operated portion when the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force (the detecting means). Encoder, sub-control board 940),
When at least one of the movement amount and the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, or becomes a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range, a predetermined display is performed. A gaming machine comprising: an operation executing means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display on a unit (decorative symbol display device 479) or operating a predetermined movable unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to the game machine. There was a possibility.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature A0 or the feature A1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the operating means including the operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the feature A0 or the feature A1, the amount of movement of the operating means or the operated portion when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force. A detecting means capable of detecting the moving speed of the vehicle is provided. When the movement amount or movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, a predetermined display is displayed on a predetermined display unit or a predetermined display is displayed by the operation execution means. The moving parts are operated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to operate the operating means according to a predetermined target value, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine.

<Feature A2>
In the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to the feature A2, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature B0>
A moving portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that the player can contact and can move in a predetermined direction (downward direction) is provided, and at least a part of the operating portion. The operating means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870), which are housed and attached to a predetermined opening, and
An actuating means (acting mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
As the neutral position of the operating means, a position where the contact surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening (or at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening) in the moving direction of the operating means, or the contact surface is the opening. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a position recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to a surface (or at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening).

<Feature B1>
An operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in the pressing direction (downward direction) by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface (operation surface 870B) is provided, and the pressing surface is played. An operating means that is housed and mounted in a predetermined opening while facing a person, and is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not pressed (button operating portion 850, operation cover member 870). When,
The operating means can be held in the neutral position when the operated portion is not pressed, and the position of the operating means is at least opposite to the pressing direction without the player pressing the operated portion. It is an operating means that can move in the direction of the above, and when the player presses the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the pressing is performed from the neutral position. The operating means can be moved in the direction of the above, and the operating means is moved from the neutral position in the pressing direction by a pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force against the operated portion, and then the operated means is operated. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the pressing operation on the portion is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least is provided.
As the neutral position of the operating means, a position where the pressing surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or the pressing surface is in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a recessed position.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1, providing a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating means that the player can contact or an operating means that the player can operate. Can be done. For example, an operating means including an operated portion that can be moved in the pressing direction by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface can be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not pressed. It is composed of. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not pressed.

Further, when the operating means presses the operated portion in a predetermined direction (more specifically, the pressing direction) with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position by the operating means. The operating means is configured to be movable from the neutral position to the pressing direction, and the operating means is operated by the pressing operation (pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) on the operated portion. Is configured to move to the neutral position side when the pressing operation on the operated portion is completed after moving from the neutral position in the pressing direction.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means at least in the direction opposite to the pressing direction without the player pressing the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, in the operating means mounted so as to be housed in a predetermined opening while facing the pressing surface (the surface on which the pressing operation is performed by the player) of the operated portion, the neutral position of the operating means is the pressing. The configuration includes at least a position where the surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface. Therefore, the position where the pressing surface of the operated portion is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or the position recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface is the neutral position of the operating means. In this case, the force of hitting the pressing surface is higher than that of the pressing surface protruding from the opening surface (more specifically, projecting in the direction opposite to the pressing direction). It is possible to make it difficult to perform a certain pressing operation.

As a result, the position where the pressing surface of the operated portion is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or the position recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface is neutral of the operating means. By setting the position, the player who operates the operating means (pressing the operated portion) does not have a strong pressing operation such as hitting the pressing surface, but a holding force (the operating means is set to the neutral position). It is possible to perform a pressing operation of pushing the pressing surface against the holding force).

Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with an operating means that enables the operating means to move from the neutral position to the pressing direction when the pressing operation is performed on the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force, the pressing operation is vigorous. Then, since it is difficult for the player to experience the operation feeling of pressing due to the momentum, the player can appropriately experience the operation feeling of pressing, so that the degree of attention to the game machine provided with the operating means can be improved.

<Feature B2>
In the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in the direction of the pressing by a player's pressing operation on the pressing surface. A gaming machine characterized in that when a player operates the pressing surface in the pressing direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body. ..

In the gaming machine according to the feature B2, in the operating means, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the player presses the pressing surface in a predetermined direction (more specifically, the pressing direction). ), The deformed elastic body allows the operated portion to move in the direction of the pressing with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the pressing operation on the pressing surface with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the object supported by the substrate via the elastic body. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, the operating portion can be made to reciprocate (reciprocating motion) between the pressing direction and the direction opposite to the pressing direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to perform a pressing operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect utilizing the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature C0>
A moving portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that the player can contact and can move in a predetermined direction (downward direction) is provided, and at least a part of the operating portion. The operating means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870), which are housed and attached to a predetermined opening, and
An actuating means (acting mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
It is provided closer to the player than the moving means and supports at least a part of the player's hand except for a part of the finger side that comes into contact with the moving part and a forearm part continuous with the hand. A support portion (hand rest 895) provided at a position where the player can contact the moving portion on the finger side of the supported portion in a state where at least a portion thereof is supported is possible. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

<Feature C1>
It is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward direction) by being operated by a player by hand, and is in a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. Operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) located in
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. It is an operating means that can be moved to the above, and when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means is moved from the neutral position to the neutral position. The operation means can be moved in a predetermined direction, and the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force with respect to the operated portion, and then the operation is performed. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means to the neutral position side when the operation on the unit is completed.
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can be changed at least.
At least a part of a portion of the player's hand that is closer to the player than the operating means, excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operated portion, and a forearm portion that is continuous with the hand. With a support portion (hand rest 895) that is supportable and that allows the player to operate the operated portion by hand on the finger side of the supported portion in a state where at least a part thereof is supported. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various measures have been taken to increase the attention to the game machine with respect to the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature C0 or the feature C1, providing a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating means that the player can contact or an operating means that the player can operate. Can be done. For example, an operating means including an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's manual operation is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. .. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated.

Further, when the operating means operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means operates in a predetermined direction from the neutral position. In addition to being movable to, the operated unit is operated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation (operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position) with respect to the operated unit. When the operation is completed, the operating means is configured to move to the neutral position side.

Further, the operating means is configured so that the operating means can move the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to at least a predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. The operating means are controlled by the motion controlling means so that the position of the operating means can be at least changeable.

Here, on the side closer to the player than the operating means, at least a part of the portion of the player's hand excluding the finger side that operates the operated portion and the forearm portion continuous with the hand is the player. Is provided with a support portion that operably supports the operated portion by hand. Therefore, when the player operates the operated portion by hand, he / she supports at least a part of the portion of the hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operated portion and the forearm portion continuous with the hand. Since it can be supported by the portion, the hand can be stabilized and the player can be prevented from operating an inappropriate position on the operated portion.

Further, since at least a part of the player's hand except for a part on the finger side that operates the operated part and at least a part of the forearm part continuous with the hand can be supported by the support part, the hand and the forearm part can be supported. It is possible to suppress the strength of the operation on the operated portion as compared with the case where the is freely moving. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who operates the operated portion (operates the operating means) to perform a vigorous operation (for example, hitting the operated portion) on the operated portion.

Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with an operating means that enables the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the operated portion is operated in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the momentum is increased. Since it is difficult for a player to experience the operation feeling of the operation with respect to the operation means in a certain operation, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine provided with the operation means.

In the gaming machines of features C0 and C1, the "hand" may be a part on the tip side of the wrist and is composed of a palm and a finger, and the "forearm part" is a part continuous with the hand. It may be the part from the wrist to the elbow.

<Feature C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
A translucent light-transmitting member (front plate) provided on the front side of the game area in which the game ball flows down so that the player can visually recognize the game area from the front side and partition the game area from the player. 222)
The operating means is provided on the front side of the translucent member.
The support portion is provided so that at least a part thereof is on the front side of the operating means.
The length in the front-rear direction from the front end of the operated portion to the rear end of the supported portion in the region including the operated portion and the supporting portion from the length in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the translucent member. The game machine is characterized in that the length excluding the above-mentioned portion is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the operated portion.

In the game machine described in the feature C2, the operating means is provided on the front side of the translucent member that partitions between the player and the game area in which the game ball flows down, and at least a part of the support portion thereof is provided. In the configuration provided so as to be on the front side of the operating means, the front end of the operating means in the region including the operated portion and the supporting portion of the operating means from the length in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the translucent member. The length excluding the length from the to the rear end of the support portion in the front-rear direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the operated portion. That is, the region including the operated portion and the supporting portion in the operating means occupies a relatively large region in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

In such a configuration, the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the translucent member (for example, the size occupies approximately half in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side, or a plurality of players are present. It can be configured with a size that can be operated with a finger, etc.). In this way, even when the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the translucent member, a support portion is provided so that at least a part of the operated portion is on the front side of the operating means. This enables a suitable operation on the operated portion (that is, an operated portion having a relatively large structure), and allows the player to experience the operation feeling of the operation on the operating means including the operated portion. be able to.

<Feature C3>
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C0 to feature C2
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a substrate (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player, and the player is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that when a portion is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the substrate due to deformation of the elastic body.

In the game machine described in the feature C3, since the operated portion is supported by the substrate via an elastic body, the operating means is elastic when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction. The deformed body allows the operated portion to move in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force for holding the operating means in the neutral position is completed, the operated portion supported by the substrate via the elastic body is supported by the substrate. Due to the inertial force received by the operated portion, it is possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) reciprocating between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for causing the player to operate, but also as a means capable of providing an effect using the vibration of the operated portion. Since the operating means can form a part of the effect, the interest in the operating means can be improved, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the game machine can be improved.

<Feature D1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can at least display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of the effect (variable display, suggestion effect) that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and when the effect is selected by the effect selection means, the storage unit before displaying the lottery result. A display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect using the effect image stored in the display unit on the display unit is provided.
The display control means targets at least a part of the plurality of types of effects during a non-gaming state in which the variable display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed. At least one unit image (frame image, still image) constituting one or more of the effect images used for the effect of the unit, or at least one unit image constituting the one or more effect images, respectively. A gaming machine characterized in that a non-game in-game image (customer waiting effect) including an image of at least one cut-out area is displayed on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature D1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, at least the effect corresponding to the lottery result can be displayed before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means. In this case, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

Further, during the non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game, one or a plurality of effects used for at least a part of the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit by the display control means. A non-gaming image composed of at least one unit image constituting an image or an image of at least one region cut out from at least one unit image constituting the one or a plurality of effect images is displayed. It is displayed in the section.

As a result, the non-game image is displayed during the non-game state waiting for the player to execute the game. Therefore, the player can display the non-game image on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. (More specifically, it is possible to recognize or guess what kind of effect (at least a part of the plurality of types of effects) is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the effect displayed on the display unit, and thereby it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

In particular, the non-gaming image is composed of a part of the effect image stored in the storage unit (more specifically, a unit image constituting the effect image or an image of a region cut out from the unit image). Since it is an image that is not played, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated image for the non-game image, the amount of storage can be suppressed by that amount, and the effect displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied ( It is possible to display a non-gaming image with the same high resolution as the effect image). Moreover, since it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated image for the non-game image, the development cost can be suppressed accordingly.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature D1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game. Instead of the description of the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit is performed. It may be in an operable state.

<Feature E1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can at least display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of the effect (variable display, suggestion effect) that can be displayed on the display unit.
A first effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
The same as the first effect selection means or the first effect selection means when the player operates the operation unit during a non-game state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed. The second effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects based on substantially the same selection conditions as above.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and when the effect is selected by the first effect selection means, the lottery result is displayed before the lottery result is displayed. A display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit is provided.
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state, the display control means causes the display unit to display a display corresponding to the lottery result, and the second effect selection means. When the effect is selected by the above, the game is characterized in that the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature E1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, at least the effect corresponding to the lottery result can be displayed before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first effect selection means selects an effect to be displayed on the display unit according to the lottery result by the lottery means from among a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit. To. On the other hand, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state waiting for the player to execute the game, a plurality of types that can be displayed on the display unit by the second effect selection means. The effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected based on the same selection conditions as the first effect selection means or substantially the same as the first effect selection means.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the first effect selection means. When selected, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the lottery result.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the display control means displays a display on the display unit corresponding to the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result. When the effect to be displayed and displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the second effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit corresponds to the lottery result. It is displayed on the display before displaying the display.

Therefore, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-game state, the effect selected under the same or substantially the same selection conditions as when the predetermined start condition is satisfied is displayed. The variation display that appears when the start condition is satisfied can be displayed at the same frequency (probability) as when the start condition is satisfied during the non-gaming state. As a result, the player can experience the effect displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied during the non-gaming state in a simulated manner with the same or substantially the same frequency as when the starting condition is satisfied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the playability brought about by the effect displayed when the starting condition is satisfied, which can improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in the feature E1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game. Instead of the description of the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation for a predetermined operation unit may be performed. It may be in an operable state.

<Feature F1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means and can at least display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result.
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (moving image data) that can be used for the plurality of types of the effect (variable display, suggestion effect) that can be displayed on the display unit.
An effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit from the plurality of types of effects when the predetermined start condition is satisfied according to the lottery result.
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
It is a display control means for displaying the effect selected by the effect selection means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed is performed. Display control means (sub-control) for displaying an effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit on the display unit when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-gaming state. Board 940) and
When a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the operation is executed between the time when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means. A part of the effect to be performed is provided with an effect non-execution means (sub-control board 940) that is not executed between the time when the predetermined operation is performed and the time when the effect selected by the effect selection means is completed. A game machine characterized by being.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, if it is the game machine described in the feature F1, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the game machine. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the display unit for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means, at least the effect corresponding to the lottery result can be displayed before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means. If so, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state waiting for the player to execute the game, the effect is selected by the effect selection means and is stored in the storage unit. The effect using the effect image is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the operation unit during the non-gaming state, one of the functions executed between the establishment of the predetermined start condition and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means. The unit is non-executed from the time when the operation unit is operated by the effect non-execution means until the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means.

Therefore, the period from when a predetermined operation to the operation unit is performed in the non-gaming state to the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (that is, the effect selected by the effect selection means) and the predetermined start condition are set. In the period from the establishment to the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (that is, the effect selected by the effect selection means), a part of the effect executed in the latter period is not executed in the former period. There is a difference in appearance in terms of points.

As a result, the effect displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-game state is different from the effect displayed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and is special after the end of the effect. Based on the difference, it is possible to make the player preferably recognize that the effect is a pseudo effect in which the gaming state is unlikely to occur.

Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the player performs a special game after the effect with respect to the effect displayed on the display unit based on, for example, the predetermined operation. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible in a pseudo-effect such as the occurrence of a state. As a result, the player mistakenly recognizes the effect displayed on the display unit by operating the operation unit during the non-game state, and as a result, the player expects the occurrence of a special gaming state that should not occur. The occurrence of unfavorable situations can be suitably suppressed.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in the feature F1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the execution of the game, or a predetermined operation on the operation unit can be performed instead of the description of the non-gaming state. It may be in an operable state.

Further, instead of the description of the effect non-execution means in the game machine described in the feature F1, the player informs the operation unit during the non-game state in which the variation display that is executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. When a predetermined operation is performed, a part of the functions executed between the establishment of the predetermined start condition and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means is produced after the predetermined operation is performed. It may be a function stop means that stops until the effect selected by the selection means is completed.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the effect that is not executed by the effect non-execution means may be an effect associated with the input operation of the input means that can be input by the player during the variable display. , An effect in which an operating body (accessory) driven by a driving means such as a motor or a solenoid performs a predetermined operation may be used.

<Feature F2>
Feature The game machine described in F1.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit after the variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the symbol, and also by the first effect selection means. When the effect is selected, the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.
When the player operates the operation unit during the non-game state, the effect non-execution means executes the variable display of the symbol, and displays the display corresponding to the lottery result after the operation unit is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not executed until it is displayed on the display unit.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F2, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit after the variable display of the symbol, while the player is in the non-gaming state. When the operation unit is operated, the effect non-execution means does not execute the variable display of the symbol between the time when the operation unit is operated and the time when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the variable display of the symbol between the time when the operation unit is operated and the time when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player operates during the non-game state. It is possible to preferably suppress misrecognition of the effect displayed on the display unit due to the operation of the unit.

<Feature F3>
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.
An operating member (accessory) that operates by a predetermined driving means,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the operation control means (secondary) for operating the operation member by driving the drive means before the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit. With a control board 940)
When the player performs the predetermined operation during the non-game state, the effect non-execution means corresponds to the operation of the operation member by the operation control means and the lottery result after the predetermined operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not executed until the display is displayed on the display unit.

In the game machine described in the feature F3, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the operating member operates before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, while the game is played during the non-game state. When a person operates the operation unit, the operation of the operating member is not executed by the effect non-execution means from the operation of the operation unit to the display of the display corresponding to the lottery result on the display unit. It is said that. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the operation of the operating member between the time when the operation unit is operated and the time when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player operates during the non-gaming state. It is possible to preferably suppress misrecognition of the effect displayed on the display unit due to the operation of the unit.

<Feature G1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display unit (decorative symbol display device 479).
An operating means (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player, and
It is a display selection means for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to select when the predetermined start condition is satisfied as the mode of the variation display to be displayed on the display unit when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state in which the variation display is not performed. Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the mode, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit at the variation time corresponding to the variation display. A control means (sub-control board 940) is provided.
The display control means is a corresponding display composed of at least a part of variable displays according to the mode selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state. At least one of the first display (suggestion effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special gaming state, or the second display including the predetermined display (holding display 1622, suggestion display 1623) that can suggest the degree of expectation. A gaming machine characterized in that a corresponding display including a corresponding display (pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration) is displayed on the display unit in a time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation display according to the selected mode.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature G1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode (specific content) to be displayed on the display unit. When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variation display selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit at the variation time corresponding to the variation display. Will be done.

On the other hand, the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state (during the non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute the game) in which the variable display that is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is not displayed. In this case, the display selection means can select the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The mode of variable display is selected.

Then, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means is a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, which is special. A first display that can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the gaming state (the degree of expectation that indicates the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state), or a second display that includes a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation. The corresponding display including at least one of the above is displayed on the display unit in a time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected variation display mode.

As a result, the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state and displays the corresponding display, which is the display corresponding to the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, thereby satisfying the predetermined starting condition. What kind of display (first display or predetermined display included in the second display) can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state even if it is not (even if the predetermined starting condition is not satisfied). It is possible to visually recognize whether it is a display. Therefore, in a configuration in which the variation display displayed when the start condition is satisfied includes the first display and the second display, which are displays that can suggest the degree of expectation, an event that can be expected after the variation display (for example, special). It is possible to improve the playability of estimating (the degree of ease of transition to the game state) from the content of the variation display, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game machine.

In particular, the corresponding display displayed when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state is displayed on the display unit in a time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation display mode selected by the display selection means. Therefore, the display that can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state (the first display or the predetermined display included in the second display) is efficiently visually recognized within a time shorter than the fluctuation time. Can be done.

It should be noted that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature G1 may be in the non-gaming state in which the variable display that is executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed, and the player executes the game. It may be in a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be in an operable state in which a predetermined operation can be performed on a predetermined operating means or a predetermined operating unit.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the "variation display selected (by the display selection means)" may be from the start to the end of the variation display, or from the start to the end of the variation display. In addition, it may include the state before or at the start of the variation display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the "corresponding display" may be the variation display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variation display in which a part of the variation display is omitted. Good.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a plurality of types including at least one of the first display or the second display as a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display. Is set,
The display control means is a mode that can be selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, and can be executed at the same timing. It is characterized in that two or more of the display effects are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A game machine to be.

In the game machine described in the feature G2, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, a plurality of different types preset for the variable display mode selected by the display selection means are different. The first display (a display included in the variable display that can suggest the expected degree of transition to the special gaming state) or the second display (a display included in the variable display and the expected degree) as a display effect. At least one of the display including the predetermined display that can suggest) is smaller in size than the case where the display control means displays the variable display selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. , At the same time, it is displayed on the display.

That is, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can display the two or more first displays at the same time during the non-gaming state. , A display (first display or a predetermined display included in the second display) that can suggest a degree of expectation of 2 or more that can appear in different variable displays executed by satisfying a plurality of start conditions. At the same time, they can be visually recognized together. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree of 2 or more in the non-gaming state, so that the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree is changed during the game. It is possible to facilitate the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference.

Further, the two or more first displays or the two or more second displays displayed at the same time are displayed in a smaller size than the case where the variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to preferably make the player recognize that the first display and the second display are displays in which a special gaming state is unlikely to occur after the display, based on the display size. ..

<Feature H1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display unit (decorative symbol display device 479).
An operating means (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player, and
It is a display selection means for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to select when the predetermined start condition is satisfied as the mode of the variation display to be displayed on the display unit when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state in which the variation display is not performed. Display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting the mode, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit is provided. ,
When the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, the display control means is a corresponding display (pseudo for demonstration) composed of at least a part of the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. (Fluctuating display) and the display corresponding to the lottery result for the corresponding display are displayed on the display unit, and at least a part of the corresponding display or at least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. A game characterized in that when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display unit is displayed in a smaller size than when a variable display according to an aspect selected by the display selection means or a lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. Machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature H1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode (specific content) to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit.

On the other hand, the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state (during the non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute the game) in which the variable display that is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is not displayed. In this case, the display selection means can select the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A variable display is selected. Then, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means provides a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, and the corresponding display. The display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit.

As a result, the player can visually recognize at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied as the corresponding display by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. Therefore, since at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed in the non-game state, the game brought about by the variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied. It is possible to increase the player's interest in sex, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game machine.

In particular, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means causes at least a part of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means), or , At least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is displayed in the section.

As a result, a part or all of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display) displayed on the display unit after a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the non-game state, or a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. , Unlike the variable display and lottery result displayed based on the fulfillment of the predetermined start conditions, the display is such that there is no possibility that a special gaming state will occur after the corresponding display ends or after the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to make the player preferably recognize that there is something based on the display size.

Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means during the non-gaming state, the special gaming state occurs after the corresponding display displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation, for example. It is possible to suppress misidentification of an event that is impossible in a non-gaming state, such as. As a result, the player mistakenly recognizes the corresponding display displayed on the display unit and the display corresponding to the lottery result by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, and thereby a special gaming state that should not occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable to the player or the clerk of the amusement park, such as expectations for the occurrence of.

It should be noted that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature H1 may be in the non-gaming state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed, and the player executes the game. It may be in a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be in an operable state in which a predetermined operation can be performed on a predetermined operating means or a predetermined operating unit.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature H1, the "variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means" may be from the start to the end of the variation display, or from the start to the end of the variation display. In addition, it may include the state before or at the start of the variation display.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature H1, the "corresponding display" may be the variation display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variation display in which a part of the variation display is omitted. Good.

<Feature H2>
Feature The game machine described in H1.
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a mode including a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display is set.
The display control means is a mode that can be selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, and can be executed at the same timing. It is characterized in that two or more of the display effects are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A game machine to be.

In the game machine described in the feature H2, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, one of a plurality of types of variable displays prepared in advance for the mode selected by the display selection means. Two or more corresponding displays corresponding to two or more variable displays in part or all are displayed targets, and at least a part of each corresponding display in the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display is display control. When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied by the means, the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed on the display unit at the same time in a smaller size than when the variable display is displayed.

That is, when there are two or more corresponding displays to be displayed, at least a part of each of the two or more corresponding displays can be displayed on the display unit at the same time, so that the player can display the same in the non-gaming state. The display effects that can be executed at the timing can be visually recognized at the same time.

Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which a variable display including a display effect capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state is prepared, the player executes the operation means at the same timing by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. It is possible to efficiently recognize the difference between two or more possible display effects that can suggest the degree of expectation by visually recognizing the variable display after the effect. As a result, the player can easily play the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation during the game.

<Feature H3>
Feature The game machine described in H2.
The display effect is a display included in the variation display selected by the display selection means, and is a first display (suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state, or the display selection means. It is configured to include at least one of the second displays including the predetermined display (hold display 1622, suggestion display 1623) which is included in the variation display selected by the above and can suggest the degree of expectation.
When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display controlling means includes the first display or the second display included in the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display, respectively. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of them is simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than the case where a variable display according to a mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. ..

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature H3, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the first display (to the special gaming state) included in each of the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display. At least one of the display (display that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition) and the second display (display including a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special gaming state) is displayed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is displayed on the display unit at the same time in a smaller size than the case where the variable display according to the mode selected by the selection means is displayed.

That is, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can display the two or more first displays at the same time during the non-gaming state. , A display (first display or a predetermined display included in the second display) that can suggest a degree of expectation of 2 or more that can appear in different variable displays executed by satisfying a plurality of start conditions. At the same time, they can be visually recognized together. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree of 2 or more in the non-gaming state, so that the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation degree is changed during the game. It is possible to facilitate the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference.

<Feature J1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display unit (decorative symbol display device 479).
An operating unit that can be operated by the player and is movable in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation (operated unit 852, operation cover member 870), and the operated unit is provided. An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) located at a predetermined neutral position in a non-operated state, and
The operating means can be held in the neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be set to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated portion. With an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that can move in the opposite direction,
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the movement of the position of the operation means by the operation means, and
It is a display selection means for selecting a variation display mode (specific content of the variation display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and is executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operating means located in the neutral position during the non-technical state in which the variable display is not performed, the predetermined starting condition is satisfied as the mode of the variable display displayed on the display unit. Display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode that can be selected in the case of
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means for displaying the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means on the display unit and displaying the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, the display control means (sub-control board 940) causes at least the display unit to display the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. ), And
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display according to the mode.
In the display control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player can operate the operation means. Is operated from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variation display is displayed on the display unit.
The motion control means is used during a period during which the operating means can be operated when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selecting means. After moving the operated portion from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, the operated portion is moved in the opposite direction to the neutral position.
In the display control means, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state and the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means, the operation control means controls the operated unit. Is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction, the gaming machine is characterized in that a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variation display is displayed on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into a start port provided in a game area and a big hit is won in a lottery performed in response to the entry, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is obtained. A transitional configuration is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various measures have been taken for the configuration of the conventional game machine, there is still a possibility that there is room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature J1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying an effect image. That is, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the game control means generates a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the above, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, at least the predetermined variation display and the lottery result by the lottery means can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects a variable display mode (specific content) to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated portion that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operating means is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the operating means in a state where the operated portion is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated portion is not operated. The operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation with respect to the operated portion by the control by the operating means.

When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state (during the non-gaming state waiting for the player to execute the game) in which the variable display is not performed, which is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. As a mode of variation display to be displayed on the display unit by the display selection means, a variation display that can be selected when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and can be selected when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Mode is selected. Then, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means at least displays the variation display according to the mode selected by the display selection means on the display unit.

As a result, the player can visually recognize the variable display that can be displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. Therefore, since the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed during the non-gaming state, the player with respect to the game playability brought about by the variable display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied. Since it is possible to increase the interest of the game machine, the degree of attention to the game machine can be increased.

Here, the variation display selected by the display selection means includes a specific variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variation display, and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. If the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means (when the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means), the specific variation is selected. When the player operates the operated portion from the neutral position in a predetermined direction during the period in which the operation means in the display can be operated, the display control means prepares a predetermined effect so as to appear in the specific variable display. Is displayed on the display.

When a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state (the player operates the operation means during the non-game state and is specified by the display selection means). (When the variable display of) is selected), after the operated portion is moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation control means during the period in which the operated portion can be operated, the operated portion is moved to the predetermined position. It is moved to the neutral position in the direction opposite to the direction of. Therefore, when a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the subject is subject to operation during the period in which the operated portion can be operated during the specific variable display. The operation unit automatically reciprocates as if it were operated by a player.

As a result, when a specific fluctuation display is displayed by the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the operated unit is operated during the period during which the operated unit can be operated during the specific fluctuation display. It is possible to simulate a situation in which the player is operated by the player without actually operating the operated portion.

Then, when the operated unit is moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the motion control means, the display control means displays a predetermined effect prepared so as to appear in the specific variable display on the display unit. .. Therefore, when a specific variation display is displayed by operating the operating means while the player is in the non-gaming state, the player is operated during the period during which the operated portion in the specific variation display can be operated. You can experience what kind of effect will appear when you operate the part, without actually operating the operated part.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific variation display (variation display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means) can appear as a variation display displayed when the start condition is satisfied, the player is in a non-gaming state. Since it is possible to experience the specific variable display in a simulated manner, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the playability brought about by the specific variable display, which enables a predetermined effect to appear with the participation of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game machine.

The non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature J1 may be in the non-gaming state in which the variation display, which is executed before the lottery result is displayed, is not performed, and the player executes the game. It may be in a non-gaming state of waiting, or instead of the description of the non-gaming state, it may be in an operable state in which a predetermined operation can be performed on a predetermined operating means or a predetermined operating unit.

<Feature J2>
The gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1.
When the player operates the operated portion in the predetermined direction during the display of the variation display based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the non-gaming state is terminated. A gaming machine including a non-gaming state ending means (sub-control board 940).

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature J2, when the player operates the operated portion in a predetermined direction during the display of the variation display based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, The non-gaming state ending means terminates the non-gaming state. Therefore, the player's operation on the operated means (more specifically, the variable display displayed based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state) is displayed in the non-gaming state. It can be easily terminated by the operation of the operated portion in a predetermined direction by the player).

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to J2 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: A launch operation means operated by a player, a game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a passage portion. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and gives a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each of the gaming parts.

Rotating body type game machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives special benefits to players.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

100 ... Game machine, 479 ... Decorative pattern display device, 611 ... Base material, 621 ... Decorative pattern, 622 ... Decorative part, 701 ... Picture, 702 ... Picture, 703 ... Picture, 721A ... Picture, 721B ... Picture, 741A ... Picture , 741B ... picture, 741C ... picture, 905 ... rear setting switch, 907 ... initialization switch, 920 ... main control board, 940 ... sub control board, 782 ... light emitting means 786 ... decorative lens part, 787 ... protruding part, 787A ... End face, 788 ... Peripheral side decorative part, 789 ... Decorative sheet, 790B ... Reflective film part, X1 ... Direct light transmitting area, X2 ... Reflected light transmitting area, 850 ... Button operation part, 851 ... Base, 852 ... Operated part, 853 ... Spring member, 860 ... Activating mechanism, 870 ... Operation cover member, 870B ... Operation surface, 895 ... Hand rest, 222 ... Front plate, 1622 ... Hold display, 1623 ... Suggestion display

Claims (2)

A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A game control means that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result.
A display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a display unit.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
It is a display selection means for selecting a variation display mode to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display executed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. A display selection means for selecting a mode that can be selected when the predetermined start condition is satisfied as a mode of variable display to be displayed on the display unit when the player operates the operation means during a non-gaming state.
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means for displaying the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit is provided.
When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display controlling means relates to a corresponding display composed of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selecting means and the corresponding display. The display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, and at least a part of the corresponding display or at least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result is displayed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

Images